Quarterlytics / Consumer Cyclical / Hardware, Equipment & Parts / TT Electronics / FY2013 Annual Report

TT Electronics
Annual Report 2013

TTG · LSE Consumer Cyclical
Claim this profile
Ticker TTG
Exchange LSE
Sector Consumer Cyclical
Industry Hardware, Equipment & Parts
Employees 5001-10,000
← All annual reports
FY2013 Annual Report · TT Electronics
Loading PDF…
Make Possible

Annual Report 2013

T

T

E

l

e

c

t

r

o

n

i

c

s

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

3

 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report

About TT Electronics

+

See pages 18-19  
for more detail

TT Electronics is an innovative global electronics 
company supplying the world’s leading 
manufacturers in the transportation, industrial, 
aerospace, defence and medical markets. 
We make things happen by developing new 
technologies in Sensing and Control, Components 
and Integrated Manufacturing Services. 
We are able to achieve this based on a deep 
understanding of our customers’ needs developed 
through strategic relationships with OEMs around 
the world. We have a truly global reach, with 
technical and manufacturing facilities at key 
locations close to our major markets. 

Driving our strategic objectives
In our previous Annual Report, we set out our strategy for 2013: to become a more 
focused electronics business and drive profitable growth through investment in 
product innovation, deeper penetration of our target markets and operational 
excellence. This strategy included commitments to: combine our Sensors and 
elements of our Components divisions into a new Sensing and Control division; 
continue investment in operational excellence by increasing our production 
footprint in best cost regions; and expand our research and development facility in 
Bangalore, India, to support established engineering centres enabling us to pursue 
more opportunities. 
We made significant progress in the execution of this strategic plan during the year, 
successfully achieving our objectives. We highlight our progress in this report, together 
with the opportunities for our reshaped business, as we enter the next phase of 
our development.

Key highlights 2013:
Successful establishment of the new Sensing and Control division to:
– bring together our current strengths in sensor, control products and solutions
– leverage these combined strengths to better address market demand for complex 

electronic systems

– streamline and focus our global sales resource in targeted markets
– establish a global product management and engineering capability to develop our 

long-term product portfolio and technologies

A proposed investment of over £30 million to scale our Sensing and Control 
operations in best cost regions by:
– commencing the relocation of production from Fullerton, USA to Mexicali, Mexico
– expanding our Romanian facility, with 22 product lines already transferred from  

Germany and Austria at 31 December 2013
– expanding our Bangalore engineering centre
Revenue growth and strong cash generation, including:
– sales growth of 4.9 per cent to £532.2 million on an underlying basis, excluding  

the effects of foreign exchange and the acquisition of ACW Technologies* 

– operating profit increase of £1.5 million to £30.2 million*
– net cash of £26.9 million at 31 December 2013
– profit before tax reduced by 16.8 per cent from £22.0 million in 2012 to 

£18.3 million in 2013

Continued investment in all areas of the business to accelerate growth and deliver 
our margin improvement targets.
*  Underlying revenue is stated excluding the effect of foreign exchange and the acquisition of ACW 
Technologies. Operating profit, unless otherwise indicated, is stated before exceptional items.

For more information on our business please visit

www.ttelectronics.com

Strategic Report

In this report

How we manage our business
Overview of key figures, products and services 
by division.

Benefiting from favourable market 
dynamics
Well-positioned to benefit from the positive 
long-term market demands.

+

See pages 8-9  
for more detail

Focus on value creation
Creating shareholder value by applying 
innovation and know-how to products and 
services for our customers.

+

See pages 20-21  
for more detail

Geraint Anderson, Group Chief Executive

Financial review
Shatish Dasani, Group Finance Director, 
provides an analysis of our financial results 
during the year, including our year end 
financial position and our objectives for 
the future.
Further information is provided about Group 
performance and our key operating divisions:
•	 Sensing and Control
•	 Components
•	 Integrated Manufacturing Services (IMS)

+

See pages 40-41 for more 
detail on our strategy

“Top-down” oversight  
Set risk appetite 
Monitor significant risks  
Alignment with strategic 
objectives at corporate level

Corporate level steering

Board of Directors
Primary responsibility for risk oversight; setting strategic objectives and defining  
risk appetite

Audit Committee
Oversee risk management  
and internal control  
processes

Risk Committee
Provides framework for managing risks;  
regular reviews of principal risks  
and risk management processes

Risk and  
assurance  
function

Operational steering and implementation

Divisional level steering and reporting
Risk identification, assessment and implementation of risk management  
action plans and actions

Business units/site level steering and reporting
Implement and embed risk management  
on operational level

“Bottom-up” identification, 
assessment and mitigation of risk 
at operational level

+

See pages 12-15  
for more detail

Technology portfolio

Greater resilience to harsh environments

Miniaturisation enhancing form and function

Key Value 
Drivers

Improved energy efficiency

Increased power density

Expanded application range

+

See pages 10-11 
for more detail

Strategy and performance
Geraint Anderson, Group Chief Executive, 
reports on our business progress in 2013 
against our strategic financial and non-
financial KPIs.
•	 Our vision
•	 Understanding market trends
•	 Focusing on strategic areas
•	 Measuring and rewarding performance
•	  Embedding our strategy across 

the organisation

+

See pages 18-19 for more 
detail on our strategy

Shatish Dasani, Group Finance Director

Understanding and managing 
our risks
Insight into our principal risks, how they 
have changed during the year and how we 
manage them.

Strategic Report

02
04
06

Chairman’s statement
Our approach
Adding Value
The value of our Sensing and 
Control offering
At a glance
08
09 Where we operate
Our business model
10
Our marketplace
12
Responding to our marketplace
14
Our integrated global manufacturing
16
Our strategy
18
Our strategy in action
20
Our Key Performance Indicators
22
How we are managing our risks
24
Our progress in 2013
28
Operating review
30
Financial review
40
Corporate responsibility
42

Directors’ Report – Governance

46
48

50
51
56
57
60
62
66
73

Introduction by the Chairman
Board of Directors and Company 
Secretary
Operating Board
Corporate governance
Nominations Committee
Audit Committee
Directors’ remuneration report
Directors’ remuneration policy
Annual report on remuneration
Other statutory disclosures

Financial Statements

76

77

79
80

81
82

83
84

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities
Independent Auditor’s report to the 
members of TT Electronics plc
Consolidated income statement
Consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income
Consolidated balance sheet
Consolidated statement of changes 
in equity
Consolidated cash flow statement
Notes to the consolidated financial 
statements

121 Company balance sheet
122 Notes to the Company financial 

statements

Additional Information
127 Five-year record
128 Shareholder information

+

See pages 24-27 for more 
detail on our risk management

01

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Chairman’s statement

Innovation and 
technology leadership 
lie at the heart of 
TT Electronics

Highlights
•	Investing for growth 

•	Increase in headline EPS 

•	8% dividend increase 

•	TSR outperformance

Sean 
Watson, 
Chairman

I am pleased to report that in 2013 we made 
significant progress in executing the Group’s 
strategic plan, as we entered the next phase 
of our development. This progress is in line 
with our objective of becoming a focused 
electronics business, driving profitable growth 
through investment in product innovation, 
deeper penetration of our target markets and 
operational excellence. 
Despite economic headwinds in a number 
of our markets, revenue grew during the year 
with sales improving to £532.2 million, an 
increase of 4.9 per cent on an underlying basis, 
excluding the effects of foreign exchange 
and the acquisition of ACW Technologies 
(ACW). Operating profit from continuing 
operations (before exceptional items) was 
ahead by £1.5 million to £30.2 million. 
Group profit margin declined to 5.7 per cent 
(2012: 6.0 per cent) as a result of continued 
investment in product development, 
productivity and programmes to improve the 
underlying cost base and lower sales in the 
Components division. Headline earnings per 
share were 14.2 pence (2012: 11.9 pence), 
an increase of 19.3 per cent.
Strong cash generation and improved working 
capital flows in the last quarter resulted 
in a net cash position of £26.9 million at 
31 December 2013. We will leverage our 
strong balance sheet to continue investing in 
the business, both organically and through 
targeted acquisitions.

Strategic and operational progress

In 2013, we announced a business 
transformation programme in line with 
our strategy, comprising specific projects 
to accelerate organic growth and drive 
towards double digit operating margin 
performance targets. 
In June 2013, we created a focused Sensing 
and Control division to capture increasing 
market opportunities for high performance, 
integrated control electronics in higher 
growth markets.

02

Total Shareholder Return (TSR) %

700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0

Dec 08

Dec 09 Dec 10 Dec 11 Dec 12 Dec 13

TT Electronics

FTSE SmallCap Index
(excluding investment trusts)

This graph shows the value, by 31 December 2013, 
of £100 invested in TT Electronics plc on 31 December 
2008 compared with the value of £100 invested in the 
FTSE SmallCap Index (excluding investment trusts). 
The other points plotted are the values at intervening 
financial year ends.

Profit before tax* £m

25

20

15

10

5

0

0.8

09

29.5

24.5

25.3

20.6

10

11

12

13

Headline earnings per share* pence

12

9

6

3

0

-3

11.4

11.9

14.2

9.0

(1.2)
09

10

11

12

13

has significantly strengthened our research, 
development and engineering capabilities, 
allowing us to address many new opportunities 
and enhance our trading relationships with 
major customers. 
Our Operational Improvement Plan, 
launched alongside the organisational 
change programme, comprises investment 
over the next two years to further improve 
operational efficiency through the proposed 
relocation of some of our manufacturing 
operations to better cost regions within the 
Group. This includes expanding our Romanian 
facility in Timisoara, which now provides 
manufacturing support for both our Sensing 
and Control and Integrated Manufacturing 
Services (IMS) divisions. 
As we have reshaped the business, we are 
closing down a number of our overseas 
sales offices and continue to serve our 
customers directly. In our IMS division we have 
successfully integrated the acquisition of ACW 
into the division’s core operations and also 
closed our manufacturing facility in Malaysia, 
transferring production to best cost locations. 
As part of our transformation to a focused 
electronics company, we carried out an in-
depth branding project to review our existing 
position, both internally and externally. 
Consequently, we are now in the process of 
launching a new TT Electronics brand to better 
reflect our new identity and clearly represent 
our business to all stakeholders. The first visible 
signs of our new branding can be seen in this 
Annual Report and on the new Group website.

Dividend per share pence 

The Board

8

6

4

2

0

0.0
09

4.4

5.0

5.4

2.8

10

11

12

13

* Before exceptional items

We completed the purchase of the minority 
interest in our Indian business in February 
2013 from our commercial joint venture 
partner, allowing us to pursue growth 
opportunities in expanding Indian markets. 
This was combined with significant investment 
in both our Indian engineering facility and our 
European centre of excellence for research 
and development, building on our established 
engineering expertise, to deliver product 
innovation for our customers.
Innovation and technology leadership lie at 
the heart of TT Electronics. We continued to 
deliver new solutions and invest in exciting 
new products during the year. This investment 

+

See Responding to our marketplace 
on pages 14-15

The Board remains committed to maintaining 
the highest standards of corporate governance 
and our procedures are described in detail 
in the Directors’ report on pages 51 to 55. 
The Board has been particularly focused on 
fulfilling the strategic initiatives described 
above during 2013, as well as helping to 
achieve a simplified operational structure, 
common processes and enhanced risk 
management procedures. I am pleased with 
the progress we have made in each of these 
areas in the past year. 
There were no changes to the composition 
of the Board during 2013. However, at the 
beginning of the new financial year we 
announced that the Group Chief Executive, 
Geraint Anderson, has decided to step down 
from the role. During his six year tenure, 
Geraint has led the transformation of the 
Group from a conglomerate to a strategically 
and operationally focused electronics business. 
On behalf of the Board I would like to take the 
opportunity to thank Geraint for his tireless 
service and outstanding contribution. He leaves 

the Group in a strong position with a clear 
strategy for future growth. 
I am delighted that Richard Tyson will succeed 
Geraint as Group Chief Executive by the end 
of June 2014. Richard joins the Group from 
Cobham plc, where he was a member of the 
Executive Committee and President of its 
Aerospace and Security Division. Richard has a 
successful track record of growing businesses 
both organically and by acquisition and the 
Board is looking forward to him joining the 
Group and building on the transformation 
process delivered under Geraint’s leadership.

Our people

The success of the Group, and our ability to 
meet the needs of our customers in a complex 
and fast-changing business environment, 
would not be possible without the hard 
work, commitment and innovation shown 
by our employees across all of our facilities. 
On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank all 
employees, each of whom has made a valued 
contribution to the progression of the business 
and its operations in the past year.

Dividend

In view of the progress made in 2013, and 
the Board’s continued confidence in the 
Group’s financial position and future prospects, 
the Board is pleased to recommend a final 
dividend of 3.8 pence which, when combined 
with the interim dividend of 1.6 pence, gives 
a total of 5.4 pence per share for the full year 
(2012: 5.0 pence per share), representing an 
increase of 8 per cent. 

The future

The positive trend in order bookings in 
the second half of 2013 has continued 
into the first quarter of 2014, providing 
encouragement for further progress. 
Our transformation programme, the 
strategic initiatives implemented during 
2013 and our investment for future growth 
combine to ensure that we will continue 
on our path to create a focused electronics 
business, that will deliver sustainable double 
digit margins. 2014 will be an important 
year as we embed the new Sensing and 
Control division, continue to simplify 
our structures, drive product innovation, 
implement the Operational Improvement 
Plan and enhance customer relationships 
across our key markets. 

Sean Watson 
Chairman

12 March 2014

03

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Our approach

Targeted growth  
plans and strategic 
actions underpinned  
by favourable  
industry trends

Transportation, industrial, aerospace, defence and medical products 
are becoming more sophisticated in response to demand for greater 
functionality, safety and performance. The increased use of complex 
electronic systems leads to the greater deployment of sensors and a 
requirement for intelligence and control. As our markets require more 
innovative approaches, at TT Electronics we are well-placed to respond, 
building on our core strengths to capture additional opportunities. 

We provide valued solutions for critical sensing and control applications. 
Our customers trust us to:

– Innovate to deliver the right solution
– Deliver rigorous programme requirements
– Supply products that work every time
– Provide global support from our highly knowledgeable people
We continue to invest in new products, services and operational 
excellence in our IMS and Components divisions, where we have strong 
positions in focused areas.

The value of our offering

Well-positioned to serve our customers

+

See page 8  
for more detail

+

See pages 6-7 
for more detail

Where we operate

+

See page 9  
for more detail

04

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcMoving with our markets
To reflect the changing complexities of our markets, we have structured 
TT Electronics to align with the demands of our target markets. 
This enables us to deliver optimal solutions, efficiently and effectively. 
Our Sensing and Control business is focused on delivering the right 
solutions to our customers by positioning the business to achieve 
the strategic aims set out below. 

+

See pages 12-13 
for more detail

Long-term growth
Our plan for growth is based on actions that have taken place over the 
last four years. We have worked hard to establish a solid base of leading 
technologies, supported by talented people, strong core processes 
and a global footprint. With our pipeline of new products, we are well 
positioned to support increasing market demand in 2014 and beyond. 

+

See pages 14-17  
for more detail

Creating value
By implementing our strategy, we are positioning the Group to serve 
our customers better, creating value for them, their customers and all 
our stakeholders. 

+

See pages 18-21  
for more detail

Innovation
– Optimising R&D
– Solutions approach
– New product pipeline

Unique offering

Sensing  
and  
Control

Profitable growth

y
c
a
m

i
t
n

i

r
e
m
o
t
s
u
C

Growth markets
– Increased penetration
– High growth markets
– Balanced businesses

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
a

l

e
x
c
e

l
l

e
n
c
e

Value creation
– Top line growth
– Double digit margin
– Improved capital return

Globalisation
– Best cost manufacturing
– Sourcing efficiency
– TTotal Business  

Excellence

05

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
Strategic Report

Adding value

The value of our Sensing 
and Control offering

Steering and Throttle

4-6 sensing and control points:

– Electronic power steering control

– Position and torque sensors

– Intelligent throttle control

Engine

8-10 sensing and control points:

– Electronic pump control

– Cam and crank speed and position

– Temperature

– Pressure

Premium car brands’ 
production continues 
to accelerate
With over 100 sensing and 
control points in a premium 
vehicle, our portfolio of 
solutions means we are 
well placed to continue 
increasing our content. 
The premium sector of 
the global vehicle market 
is forecast to increase  
5.5 per cent per year 
from 2013-20201 giving 
a long-term, favourable 
environment for growth.

Average Sensing and Control 
content per vehicle* 
300€

200€

100€

0€

<2010

2013

* German luxury brand

1 PWC Autofacts

06

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcTransmission

3-5 sensing and control points:

– Smart gear detection and control

– Bearing wear

– Fluid pressure, level, and temperature

– Transmission control

Braking and Suspension

6-8 sensing and control points:

– ABS speed

– Smart chassis height and position

– Brake fluid level and pressure

Exhaust

8-12 sensing and control points:

– Gas temperature and pressure
– NOx sensing
– Urea/ad blue level and condition

Industrial automation

2

1

5

3

4

A wide industrial portfolio

As demands for efficiency and safety 
increase, the need for increasing 
levels of automation and more 
sophisticated control is accelerating 
the requirement for sensing and 
control solutions. Our plans for 
growth include building on our 
strong base of capabilities and 
technologies to expand further into 
high growth industrial applications. 
With the underlying market for 
industrial automation forecast to 
increase by 7.7 per cent on average 
from 2012 to 20151, this represents 
a significant opportunity for growth.

1. Compressor

10-50 sensing and control points

2. CNC machine

25-40 sensing and control points

3. Conveyor

10-50 sensing and control points

4. Motors/speed drives

5-10 sensing and control points

5. Power supply

5-10 sensing and control points

1 IMS Global Industrial Automation Market, May 2012

07

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

At a glance

Well-positioned to serve our customers

What we do
TT Electronics enables global customers to develop cutting-edge products by leading 
innovation in the transportation, industrial, aerospace, defence and medical markets.

How we are organised
Sensing and Control – Providing sensing and control solutions for critical applications which 
require high levels of expertise, precision and reliability for leading customers, globally. 
Integrated Manufacturing Services – Providing manufacturing skills and technologies at 
strategically located sites combining a global presence with local teams in key regions to 
support our customers’ global ambitions.
Components – Working in partnership, from concept to manufacture, in the transportation, 
industrial, aerospace, defence and medical markets.

Division

Description

Market focus

Manufactures 
sensors and 
controls 
for demanding 
applications

•	 Transportation

•	 Industrial

•	 Medical

•	 Aerospace

Revenue
£285.2m
+6.1%

Operating profit
£17.3m
+1.2%

Product

Sensing and 
Control

See pages 34-35  
for more detail

Integrated 
Manufacturing 
Services

See pages 36-37  
for more detail

Components

See pages 38-39  
for more detail

Provides  
specialist 
electronic 
manufacturing 
services

•	 Defence

•	 Aerospace

•	 Medical

•	 Industrial

£146.6m
+15.9%

£8.8m
+11.1%

Engineers 
solutions for
resistors, 
microcircuits and 
connectors 

•	 Transportation

•	 Industrial

•	 Defence

•	 Aerospace

•	 Medical

£100.4m
-8.7%

£4.1m
-28.8%

Typical  
application

•	 Powertrain

•	 Process controls

•	 Flight controls

•	 Innovative 

supply chain 
solutions across 
the complete 
product lifecycle

•	 Medical  

instruments

•	 Analytical  
equipment 

•	 Defence  

vehicles and  
communications

Revenue by division % 

Operating profit by division % 

Return on capital employed % 

Sensing  
and Control

Integrated 
Manufacturing
Services (IMS)

54%

27%

Components

19%

Sensing  
and Control

Integrated 
Manufacturing
Services (IMS)

57%

29%

Components

14%

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

33.2

28.2

13.0

12.7

16.7

11.3

12

13

12

13

12

13

Sensing 
and Control

Integrated
Manufacturing
Solutions (IMS)

Components

Note: Change in revenue percentage shown at constant FX rates and before ACW acquisition. Operating profit is stated before exceptional items.

08

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Where we operate

We operate globally, with a sales, engineering and manufacturing presence in all major 
regions, and we are well-positioned to serve our customers in our focus markets.

Bedlington, UK

Cambridge, UK

Werne, Germany

Klingenberg, Germany

Carrollton, USA

Perry, USA

Fullerton, USA

Mexicali, Mexico

Abercynon, UK

Rogerstone, UK

Fairford, UK

Weybridge, UK

Lutterworth, UK

Juarez, Mexico

Corpus Christi, USA

Barbados

Timisoara, Romania

Salzburg, Austria

Suzhou, China

Manesar, India

Kuantan, Malaysia

Bangalore, India

Our customers
We play to our strengths in five key markets: transportation, industrial, aerospace, 
defence and medical. Our customers are renowned for their global brands and innovative 
approaches in each of these areas. We work with them to understand and support their 
future technologies and requirements.

Revenue by market (2013) 

Revenue by region (2013) 

Passenger car

Industrial

Defence and 
Aerospace

40%

26%

13%

Transportation, 
non-passenger car

9%

Medical

Other

8%

4%

Rest of Europe

North America

49%

18%

United Kingdom 20%

Asia

13%

09

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Our business model

Customers are at the centre of our business model. 
By understanding their long-term needs and 
requirements, we can develop the right solutions 
and support them anywhere in the world. We believe 
this business model creates a long-term competitive 
advantage, delivering value for all stakeholders. We apply 
expert knowledge and innovation to our products and 
services, and invest in global best cost manufacturing 
solutions for future growth.

Our business in context 
Our customers seek to differentiate themselves in competitive markets 
through the rapid development and manufacture of complex high-
performing products which rely on critical electronic sub-systems and 
components. They trust TT Electronics because we understand their 
challenges and have a reputation for providing innovative and reliable 
technical solutions combined with the ability to support them globally.

+

For more information about market 
trends please see pages 12-13

Our technology portfolio

Key Value 
Drivers

Greater resilience to harsh environments

Miniaturisation enhancing form and function

Improved energy efficiency

Increased power density

Expanded application range

Investment and return model

The Sensing and Control and Components divisions create value by applying their electronic, 
mechanical engineering, materials and process expertise to develop complex electronic systems 
and components, in turn enabling their customers to deliver higher performing products.  
The IMS division leverages its global footprint, leading manufacturing capabilities and supply 
chain expertise to deliver world-class end-to-end manufacturing solutions.

Customer 
engagement 
phase

Up to 2 years

Delivery phase

1 – 6+ years

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Investment

Return

10

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcOur value cycle

1.
  Understanding  

market 
needs 

5.
Generating  
sustainable  
returns

2.
Developing  
customer  
relationships

4.
Investing in  
best cost, global  
operations

3.
Providing  
value added 
solutions

1. Understanding market needs 
We analyse global drivers and trends to determine attractive areas for growth.  
In all major markets, we have teams working with existing and new customers to 
understand future requirements. 

2. Developing customer relationships 
By building close relationships, we identify where we can apply our expertise to support our 
customers and help them realise their objectives. We seek to identify specific requirements that 
span multiple customers in our target markets, thereby increasing the scale of the opportunity. 

3. Providing value added solutions 
Our engineering teams engage early in the design process, using their experience to quickly 
understand the customer’s specific requirements, often working alongside their development 
teams. Using the Group’s core technologies and product platforms, our teams identify the 
best solution to exceed the customer’s requirements in terms of performance, reliability, size 
and cost.

4. Investing in best cost, global operations
Our geographical footprint means we are well placed to provide manufacturing and after sales 
service and support in all major regions. We have a broad manufacturing presence, with our 
traditional locations in North America, Europe and China being complemented by the ongoing 
development of additional better cost centres of excellence in Mexico, Romania and India. 
Our Group-wide focus on productivity improvement and manufacturing excellence ensures 
that our operations remain competitive.

5. Generating sustainable returns
By applying strict investment criteria to our capital expenditure projects we remain focused on 
generating long-term returns on investment. Cash generated is used to strengthen our balance 
sheet, make returns to shareholders and re-invest in the business for growth. 

11

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
Strategic Report

Our marketplace

Increasing demand for our products is driven by three principal trends:

Performance
Demand for increasingly 
sophisticated end-user products 
is generating a need for more 
complex, smaller electronic 
solutions to increase:
•	Functionality
•	Efficiency
•	Power
•	Reliability	and	Accuracy

Regulation
Changing regulations, particularly 
in the areas of safety and the 
environment, are increasing the 
levels of investment in:
•	Efficient	energy	generation,	
distribution and consumption

•	Systems	to	improve	performance	

and reduce emissions in 
Transportation, Aerospace 
and Defence markets

Growth and prosperity
Rising GDP, living standards and 
disposable incomes, particularly in 
emerging economies, are increasing 
demand in our core markets:
•	Industrial
•	Medical
•	Transportation
•	Aerospace
•	Defence

How these trends influence our markets

Light vehicle opportunity 

Light vehicle unit growth

+5%    CAGR (‘13 – ‘16)

Powertrain sensors

+6%    CAGR (‘13 – ‘16)

Safety & control sensors

+14%  CAGR (‘13 – ‘16)

Alternative fuel system sensors

+12%  CAGR (‘13 – ‘16)

12

)
n
b
£
(

l

s
e
a
s

r
o
s
n
e
S

10

8

6

4

2

0

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

)
s
t
i
n
u
m

(

l

s
e
a
s
e
l
c
i
h
e
v

t
h
g
i
L

2013

2014

2015

2016

Sensor content grows at 7% CAGR

Alternative fuel

Safety and Control

Powertrain

Light vehicles

2012 Markets and Markets, Global Sensor Market for Automotive Applications, IHS Forecast Light Vehicle Sales

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
 
 
 
 
Focused market sector

Transportation:  
Passenger vehicles

Industrial

Market size and compound  
annual growth rates1

£4.5 billion
8.0%

Growth drivers
•	 Emerging economies 

•	 Improved safety and performance 

•	 Emissions reduction

£4.1 billion
6.8%

•	 More complex processes 

•	 Demand for automation 

•	 Increased levels of control 

•	 Safety regulations

Defence and aerospace

£0.5 billion
6.6%

•	 Growth in air travel

•	 Increased investment 

in infrastructure

•	 Improved operating efficiencies

•	 Communications growth

Medical

£0.3 billion
7.0%

Transportation:  
non-passenger car

£0.2 billion
7.0%

1 Total addressable market for position, speed, pressure and temperature.  
   2013 market size: BCC, VDC, Markets and Markets. 2013-2016 CAGR.

•	 High disposable incomes 

increasing access to medical care 
in emerging economies 

•	 Ageing populations in 
developed countries 

•	 Increasing demand for more 
sophisticated instruments

•	 Emissions standards

•	 Performance, safety and comfort 

•	 Fuel economy

•	 Improved productivity

13

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Responding to our marketplace

TT Electronics Resistors business unit has expanded its market 
leading portfolio of fusing resistor products recognised by the 
safety agency UL. These parts combine in a single component 
the safety function of a fuse with the protective function of 
a resistor. In 2013, fibre core technology was added to this 
UL-recognised range including the SPP series, which delivers 
the benefit of more rapid fusing under fault conditions, thus 
guarding against overheating and fire. Belimo, a global 
market leader in the development, production and marketing 
of actuator solutions for controlling heating, ventilation and 
air conditioning systems, have designed the SPP1 into their 
range of actuators. This is an application in which prevention 
and control of fire and smoke is critically important, and 
TT Electronics is supporting Belimo in meeting stringent 
safety standards.

Transparency Market Research estimates the global HVAC 
equipment market is expected to exceed $139 billion by 2018, 
growing at a CAGR of 8.9 per cent from 2012 to 2018.

Visit www.ttelectronics.com 
for more detail

Making the world a safer place

14

Going where the growth is

In 2013, the TT Electronics IMS division secured a significant 
new business award with the Shanghai Avionics Corporation 
(SAVIC). SAVIC is a major provider of avionics products to 
the Chinese aviation industry and is owned by AVIC. IMS was 
chosen for its reputation as a global leader in manufacturing 
electronics for the aerospace market, a best in class quality 
system underpinned by Nadcap accreditation and a history of 
supporting the C919 program including previously awarded 
business by AVIAGE, a joint venture between General Electric 
and AVIC.

According to the predictions of The Aviation Industry Corporation 
of China (AVIC), in the next 20 years, China will have an increase 
of nearly 5,000 commercial airliners.

Visit www.ttelectronics.com 
for more detail

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcTT Electronics Sensing and Control division is combining 
its expertise in sensing technology and e-mobility to bring 
efficiency and comfort to a new range of pedal gear 
assemblies developed for e-bikes. The new contactless 
rotational speed sensor for INA Schaeffler provides 36 speed 
pulses per wheel revolution, significantly greater than the 
market standard of five to eight pulses. Higher accuracy 
improves efficiency and rider comfort, enabling the customer 
to offer a truly unique selling proposition.

Navigant forecasts that the number of e-bicycles in Western 
Europe will grow 9.1 per cent per year from 2013 to 2020, with 
sales increasing from 1 million to 1.9 million over the period.

Visit www.ttelectronics.com 
for more detail

Expanding our focus markets 

Next generation healthcare 

GE Healthcare is a global leader in medical imaging, 
information technologies and patient monitoring systems. 
The Optoelectronics business unit, within TT Electronics 
Sensing and Control division, has been supporting 
GEHC’s engineering teams by supplying products for their 
sophisticated patient monitoring equipment for adequacy 
of anaesthesia, respiratory data and hemodynamics. 
TT Electronics remains committed to designing and 
manufacturing engineered custom products to support the 
medical markets.

In 2016, the global healthcare equipment market is forecast to 
have a value of $215.2 billion, an increase of 25.5 per cent since 
2011 as estimated by Marketline. 

Visit www.ttelectronics.com 
for more detail

15

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Our integrated global manufacturing

Sensing and Control operations

Werne, Germany

Klingenberg, Germany

Timisoara, Romania

Salzburg, Austria

Suzhou, China

Manesar, India

Fullerton, USA

Mexicali, Mexico

Juarez, Mexico

Best cost operations

Operations

Our Operational Improvement Plan 
As announced in June 2013, over the next 24 months we are 
investing approximately £30 million in order to restructure our 
operational footprint, move production to best cost regions, and 
improve our overall performance.
Estimated benefits of the plan are around £8 million per annum, 
to be realised from the second half of 2015 onwards, giving a cash 
flow payback of less than four years and contributing to the delivery 
of our operating margin targets.

16 

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcBuilding on our strengths to create differentiation
We have significant programmes underway to improve 
operational efficiencies and productivity.
We are continuing to roll out our common enterprise 
resource management platform, redesigning our 
customer service organisation, and expanding our 
TTotal Business Excellence (TTBE) programme 
throughout the Sensing and Control division (see page 
34 for more details). Furthermore, we have launched 
standard business processes globally for financial 
controls, customer relationship management (CRM) 
and new product introduction. 

Sensing
and
Control

Components

IMS

Key initiatives in 2013

Plans for 2014

•	 Developed a global 

procurement strategy

•	 Increase proportion of 

spend in best cost regions 

•	 Launched the Operational 

•	 Deliver best cost 

Improvement Plan 

•	 Embedded TTotal Business 
Excellence programme

operational footprint by 
undertaking the move of 
production from Werne, 
Germany and Fullerton, 
California

•	 Achieve a Six Sigma 
performance across 
the division

•	 Increased performance 

•	 Achieve targeted 

of Mexicali facility 

•	 Implemented actions 
to improve profitability 
in the Power and 
Hybrid, Magnetics and 
Connectors businesses

•	 Closed loss-making USA 
connectors business

performance from move 
to Mexicali, Mexico, from 
Boone, North Carolina

•	 End production in 

Smithfield, South Carolina, 
and Fullerton, California

•	 Deliver operational 

improvements to support 
progress to double 
digit profitability

•	 Launched facility 

in Romania 

•	 Expand Romanian facility

•	 Integrate Tonypandy and 

•	 Integrated ACW acquisition

Rogerstone sites

•	 Transferred UK and 

•	 Build on growth achieved 

US harness/box build 
businesses from 
Components into IMS

•	 Closed Malaysia facility

in 2013

17

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcCreating sustainable 
value for our 
stakeholders by 
delivering innovative 
solutions

Measuring and rewarding performance
Our KPIs, a mixture of financial and non-
financial metrics, are used to measure our 
overall performance against our plans. 
Importantly, four of these KPIs are used 
to determine short-term and long-term 
remuneration rewards, reinforcing our policy to 
relate reward to clearly defined performance 
criteria. See page 19.

Embedding our strategy across the 
organisation
Our strategy is embedded in the organisation 
through an annual planning cycle. Over the 
course of this cycle, we assess progress against 
previous plans, adjust strategies where 
required and determine our plans for the next 
three year period. These strategic plans then 
determine the key activities and targets for the 
following calendar year, allowing us to track 
progress against the implementation of our 
strategic priorities. The KPIs we have selected 
are based on the activities and targets we set, 
ensuring that our strategy is embedded across 
the organisation. 

Our vision
Our vision is to be the preferred and most 
trusted provider of performance critical 
technology solutions to world-leading 
manufacturers, embedding innovation in 
everything we do.

Understanding market trends
Understanding the macro trends affecting 
our customers’ end markets is pivotal to the 
shaping of our strategy. Demand for improved 
product performance and functionality, 
linked to regulatory changes and high growth 
in emerging markets, is creating increased 
requirements for our products. We cover these 
trends in more detail on pages 12-13.

Focusing on strategic areas
We have established four areas of 
strategic focus:

•		Growth	markets

•		Globalisation	

•		Innovation	

•		Culture	

These areas influence our long-term strategic 
planning and are explained in detail on the 
opposite page.

Geraint 
Anderson,
Group Chief 
Executive

Strategic Report

Our strategy

18

Market trends shaping our strategic thinking

Performance

Regulation

Growth and 
prosperity

Strategic focus areas 

 Growth markets

 Globalisation

 Innovation

 Culture

+

See pages 12-13  
for more detail

We are focused on high growth 
markets and the leading global 
players in these markets.

We aim to accelerate our 
global presence by investing in 
manufacturing in best cost regions 
and providing local sales and 
technical support worldwide.

We are committed to 
understanding and applying 
innovation in order to differentiate 
our products and those of 
our customers.

We have a clear set of values that 
provide a framework within which 
we expect all of our employees 
to operate.

We put the customer at the heart 
of everything we do, supported 
by teamwork, innovation and a 
passion for excellence.

+

See pages 20-21  
for more detail

Our execution
2.
1.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Targeting high 
growth markets

Increasing 
customer 
intimacy

Expanding 
internationally

Seeking 
acquisitions for 
technological 
advancement

Differentiation 
through 
innovation

Investment  
in people

TTotal Business 
Excellence

Measuring our overall performance
Financial KPIs

+

See pages 22-23  
for more detail

Non-financial KPIs

Organic revenue 
growth

Operating profit 
margin

EPS  
growth

Relative TSR

Operating cash 
conversion

Safety 
performance

Employee 
engagement

R

R

R

R

R   Linkage to remuneration

+

See pages 22-23  
for more detail

19

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Our strategy in action

Providing a  
unique product 
portfolio 
addressing 
customer needs

Helping our customers succeed by 
designing the right products and 
providing support. Focused where the 
growth is: markets, regions, customers. 
Investing in our people for the long term.

Delivering growth

HVDC (high-voltage direct current) is a highly efficient 
alternative for transmitting large amounts of electricity over 
long distances and for special purpose applications. As a key 
enabler in the future energy system based on renewables, 
HVDC is shaping the grid of the future. As the global 
market for renewable energy sources continues to increase, 
ABB Power Systems’ HVDC unit has selected TT Electronics 
Sensing and Control division as its partner for the supply of 
reliable long-life components used in cutting-edge power 
conversion and control applications. TT Electronics is creating 
custom infra-red diodes-emitters and receivers and custom 
fibre optic transmitters which ABB is incorporating into fully 
enclosed fibre optic automated power control systems.  

Growth markets   See page 19 for more detail

Visit www.ttelectronics.com 
for more detail

20

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcTT Electronics Sensing and Control division has expanded 
and strengthened its team in Asia to drive growth in the 
region and provide a focus for the Korean market. As an 
important strategic customer, Hyundai Motor Corporation 
(HMC) has now signed a mutual cooperation agreement 
with TT Electronics for future collaboration on sensors and 
pedal products. The agreement is a result of high-level 
discussions between the companies. TT Electronics will be 
supporting HMC on a global basis and has nominated a 
dedicated project team to support the relationship and 
ensure programmes run effectively.

Globalisation   See page 19 for more detail

Visit www.ttelectronics.com 
for more detail

Building global partnerships

Working together

Datacard Group empowers financial institutions, government 
agencies and other enterprises in more than 150 countries 
to securely issue and personalise financial cards, passports, 
national IDs, employee badges, mobile payment applications 
and other credentials. TT Electronics Sensing and Control 
division provides both the IR and custom assembly to detect 
the presence of an ID badge as it is cycled from a magazine 
cartridge to the printing station. The Optoelectronics business 
unit provides a unique sensor able to detect the presence of 
an object that is not always presented in a linear fashion.

Innovation   See page 19 for more detail

Visit www.ttelectronics.com 
for more detail

21

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Our Key Performance Indicators

We use a number of financial and non-financial key performance indicators 
(KPIs) to measure our performance over time. These KPIs were first 
established in 2009.

Financial

1

Organic revenue growth

15

10

5

0

-5

8.9%

4.9%

-4.3%

R

2
Earnings per share (EPS) 
growth

R

3
Operating cash  
conversion

R

4
Relative total shareholder 
return (TSR)

26.7%

30

20

10

0

19.3%

10.5%

121%

150

120

90

60

30

0

70%

52%

2013

2012

2011

2nd Quartile

3rd Quartile

3rd Quartile

11

12

13

11

12

13

11

12

13

Performance:

Target : 

Each year.  

Mid to high single digits

Target : 

Year on year growth of 
3% 
in excess of RPI

Target : 

Each year, to 2012
100% 

Target : 

In medium term 
above median performance 
against the FTSE SmallCap 
(excluding investment trusts)

Definition

Definition

Definition

Definition

Organic revenue growth is 
the percentage change in 
revenue from continuing Group 
operations in the current year 
from the prior year. The effects 
of currency movements, 
divestments and acquisitions 
made during the current 
or prior financial year have 
been removed.

This KPI measures our strategy 
in growth markets.

Performance

Organic revenue increased in 
2013 by 4.9 per cent reflecting 
new business won through 
existing and new customers. 

+

See page 33  
for more detail

R KPIs linked to remuneration  

(see pages 60-72)

EPS is calculated as profit 
before exceptional items 
from continuing operations 
attributable to shareholders, 
divided by the weighted 
average number of shares 
in issue during the year.

We have chosen EPS growth 
as a KPI as it is a standard 
metric to determine corporate 
profitability for shareholders. 

In addition, it is a measure 
used as one of the 
performance conditions in the 
Group’s Long Term Incentive 
Plan – see further details on 
page 66.

Performance

EPS from continuing 
operations increased from 11.9 
pence in 2012 to 14.2 pence 
in 2013. The growth in EPS of 
19.3 per cent was significantly 
ahead of our target. 

Operating cash conversion 
is defined as cash generated 
from continuing operations 
after capital and development 
expenditure, expressed as 
a percentage of operating 
profit before exceptional items 
from continuing operations. 
Cash conversion is an 
important metric to track the 
management of our working 
capital and capital expenditure.

Performance

A target of 100 per cent 
conversion was set for the 
three years 2010 to 2012 
only, and was met with a total 
conversion of 117 per cent. 
For 2013, the conversion was 
52 per cent, reflecting the 
investment made to position 
the business for future growth 
and expand facilities in best 
cost regions.

TSR is defined as capital 
growth plus dividends paid, 
assuming dividends are re-
invested over the period using 
a three-month opening and 
closing average.

We believe that TSR is an 
important KPI because it 
measures the delivery of 
shareholder value as well as 
performance. In addition, it is 
a measure used as one of the 
performance conditions in the 
Group’s Long Term Incentive 
Plan – see further details on 
page 66.

Performance

The Group’s TSR for 2013 was 
50.3 per cent compared to the 
median of the comparator 
group of 42.8 per cent.

22

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
Financial (continued)

Non-Financial

5

R

6

R

7

Operating profit margin

Safety performance

Employee engagement

Group

Sensing and Control

5.6%

6.0%

5.7%

8

6

4

2

0

5.9%

6.4%

6.1%

8

6

4

2

0

8

6

4

2

0

5.1

3.6

3.7

8

6

4

2

0

4.31

4.28

4.43

11

12

13

11

12

13

11

12

13

11

12

13

Components

IMS

8

6

4

2

0

5.7%

5.4%

4.1%

8

6

4

2

0

5.8%

6.0%

4.7%

Performance:

Target : 

Zero injuries

11

12

13

11

12

13

Target : 

In the medium term 
achieve UK mid-size  
manufacturing benchmark, 
2013: 4.72

Performance:

Target : 

Group:  
8-10% 

Target : 

Components: 
10%

Definition

Target : 

Sensing and Control:  
10% 

Target : 

IMS:  
6-8% 

Performance

Operating profit margin is 
defined as operating profit 
before exceptional items from 
continuing operations expressed 
as a percentage of revenue 
from continuing operations.

This KPI is appropriate because 
we are focused on increasing 
the proportion of revenue from 
those markets where we can 
make higher returns, in addition 
to delivering an improvement in 
operational efficiency.

Operating margins in Sensing 
and Control were affected by 
the investments being made 
to improve future productivity 
and develop new products. 
In addition the Components 
business suffered from lower 
sales in particular in the first 
half of the year. The IMS 
division improved margins 
and remained within its 
target range.

Definition

Definition

Safety performance is defined 
as the number of occupational 
injuries resulting in three 
or more days absence per 
1,000 employees.

This KPI allows us to compare 
our performance with that 
of our peers. We use a UK 
benchmark published by the 
Health and Safety Executive 
and apply this to all of our 
facilities worldwide, reflecting 
our commitment to raising 
standards globally. 

Performance

We are committed to a target 
of zero injuries. Whilst the total 
number of injuries reduced 
by five per cent during the 
year, our average headcount 
reduced by six per cent, 
resulting in a marginal increase 
in our three day or more 
absence per 1,000 employees.

We use our employee 
survey to measure how 
our employees feel about 
working in TT using a scale 
of 1 (low) to 7 (high) against 
eight factors (as surveyed by 
Best Companies Ltd).

Performance

The response rate from this 
year’s survey was 65 per cent, 
compared to the industry 
benchmark of 47 per cent.

The results show an 
improvement of 3.5 per cent 
in our overall engagement 
score which is seen as a 
positive movement given 
the context of our significant 
transformation programme 
which commenced in 2013. 
We will be sharing the results 
of our latest survey with 
our employees and will be 
developing plans to further 
drive improvements.

23

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
 
Strategic Report

How we are managing our risks

Risk management framework
The Board of Directors has overall responsibility for risk 
management and internal controls, supported by the Audit 
Committee and the Risk Committee. The Board defines risk 
appetite and monitors the management of significant risks 
to ensure that the nature and extent of significant risks taken 
by the Company are aligned with overall goals and strategic 
objectives. The Risk Committee supports the Board and the 
Audit Committee in monitoring the exposure through regular 
reviews and has been delegated responsibility for reviewing 
the effectiveness of risk management processes and controls. 
The Risk and Assurance function assists the Risk Committee 
in defining improvements to be made to the overall risk 
management framework and evaluating the design and 
operating effectiveness of the framework as well as risk 
mitigation strategies implemented by management. 

Risk management processes and internal control procedures 
are established within business practices across all levels of the 
organisation. Risk identification, assessment and mitigation 
are performed both “bottom-up” with more detailed 
assessment at operational level, as well as through “top-down” 
assessment of strategic and market risk at the executive 
management and Board level. 

Risk management and internal controls provide reasonable 
but not absolute protection against risk. Risk appetite is not 
static and will be reassessed on an ongoing basis to ensure it 
continues to be aligned with goals and strategy.

Per-Olof 
Ahlstrom,
 Group Head 
of Risk and 
Assurance

24

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc“Top-down” oversight  
Set risk appetite 
Monitor significant risks  
Alignment with strategic 
objectives at corporate level

Corporate level steering

Board of Directors
Primary responsibility for risk oversight; setting strategic objectives and defining  
risk appetite

Audit Committee
Oversee risk management  
and internal control  
processes

Risk Committee
Provides framework for managing risks;  
regular reviews of principal risks  
and risk management processes

Risk and  
assurance  
function

Operational steering and implementation

Divisional level steering and reporting
Risk identification, assessment and implementation of risk management  
action plans and actions

Business units/site level steering and reporting
Implement and embed risk management  
on operational level

“Bottom-up” identification, 
assessment and mitigation of risk 
at operational level

Risk management  
developments during 2013
Following changes implemented in 2012 (which included 
clarifying roles and responsibilities throughout the 
governance structure, refreshing the Group-wide risk 
framework, training and communication), 2013 has been 
a year of consolidating and embedding processes.  
The key areas of focus were:

Developments during 
2013 include:

Benefits for 
our stakeholders:

1. Continued to improve management understanding of risk 
quantification and appetite

Supports the Board, Audit 
Committee and executive 
management with an improved 
mechanism for understanding 
risk exposure, defining the risk 
appetite, prioritising action plans, 
as well as linking significant 
risks to company strategy 
and objectives.

The more structured approach 
for risk identification and 
assessment, incorporating a 
“top-down” and “bottom-up” 
perspective on risk has been 
further strengthened by the 
roll-out of a Group-wide online 
risk management tool. The tool 
has enabled management 
to link and consolidate risks 
across all levels of the Group, 
improving visibility and 
monitoring of risk quantification, 
values at risk, trends, gap 
analysis, developments and 
actions required. The process 
and supporting tool has 
improved management risk 
review, prioritisation and 
associated actions.

2. More robust risk management for strategic projects

We have rolled-out consistent 
project risk assessment for 
key strategic projects, aligned 
with the company project 
management framework. 
Risk assessments are now part 
of project steering reviews and 
the “Go/No Go” decision making 
process at key milestones/gates. 

Improved proactive project 
risk management enables 
management to define 
risk appetite for key project 
deliverables and business 
case benefits enhancing the 
prioritisation and decision 
making process, thereby 
strengthening the chances of 
delivering the Group’s objectives.

3. Embedding the refreshed risk culture throughout the Group

Risk management is an evolving 
process. This is recognised by 
ongoing training and advice 
by divisional and business 
unit risk representatives, 
supported by the central risk and 
assurance team, best practice 
sharing, gap analysis, and 
internal benchmarking.

Successful training and 
communication help build 
a culture and ability to 
further embed processes and 
procedures throughout the 
organisation. A more deeply 
embedded risk management 
culture supports long-term value 
creation for all stakeholders.

Risk profile
New and existing risks were identified and assessed during 
2013. Executive management, the Risk Committee and 
the Board of Directors performed further analysis to 
prioritise these risks with a focus on those principal risks 
posing the highest current risk to the achievement of 
company objectives. Risks assessed as higher priority were 
consolidated onto a Risk Heat Map. Risks included on 
the heat map are monitored more closely by executive 
management, the Risk Committee and the Board of 
Directors. Whilst these principal “top risks” represent 
a significant portion of the Group’s overall risk profile, 
executive management and the Risk Committee continue 

to monitor the entire universe of risks to identify new or 
emerging risks as well as any changes in risk exposure. 

The overall Group risk profile evolved during the year. 
High level trends include a reduced exposure to external 
threats, such as a continued economic downturn, with key 
indicators such as the Purchasing Managers’ Index and 
order book intake improving in key markets during the 
second half of the year. Internally, we intensified efforts to 
transform operations by consolidating manufacturing sites 
and setting up manufacturing and engineering capability 
in lower cost regions, thereby increasing the potential risk 
of customer service disruption or the delay of planned 
cost savings.

25

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

How we are managing our risks

Principal risks
The “top principal risks” presented below are not shown in any order of priority. The risks have been linked to the strategic 
objectives of 
that the Group is exposed to additional risks that are not considered material but which could have an adverse impact.

 Culture outlined on page 19. It should be noted 

 Globalisation and 

 Growth markets, 

 Innovation, 

Strategic
objective

Risk description
and context
Strategic, Market and Brand
Economic downturn

Mitigation 
actions

Change
in 2013 

General economic downturn leading to a reduction in 
customer demand and production volumes impacting 
sales and margins. 

The macro economic outlook improved during the year. 
Key indicators like Purchasing Managers Index and order 
book intake improved in key markets.

Forward-looking indicators are regularly reviewed to identify deteriorating 
market conditions. 

Management structures are in place to enable a rapid response to 
changing circumstances.

Alternative “economic downturn” plans are in place.

Acquisitions

The Group pursues acquisitions as part of its overall 
growth strategy. Such acquisitions may not realise 
expected benefits.

Disposals

Performing robust due diligence.

Obtaining representations, warranties and indemnities from vendors where possible. 

Implementing business integration processes.

The Group disposes of non-core businesses not supporting 
the growth strategy in key markets. Risks include not 
achieving an expected sale price, unsuccessful or delayed 
disposal processes, or deteriorating business performance. 

Assemble cross functional team with necessary skill sets. 

Regular reviews with project team. 

Close monitoring of representations, warranties, and indemnities. 

New products or technical capability

The Group is seeking to introduce an increased number of 
new product offerings to key customers to grow existing 
and create new business opportunities. Risks include 
potential write-off for unsuccessful projects, project 
overruns, and not achieving expected customer contracts, 
market pricing and benefits. 

Robust project delivery and cost controls throughout product and project 
development cycle.

Close communication and working relationships with key customers to ensure 
products meet expectation and demand. 

Regular project reviews with standard gated processes.

Operational improvement plan

The Group is implementing an Operational Improvement 
Plan involving the proposed transfer of manufacturing from 
Fullerton, USA and Werne, Germany to best cost locations, 
and also the closure of sales offices in Japan, France and 
Italy. Risks include disruption to customer base, loss of key 
talent, and delayed or unsuccessful cost savings.

Strong change management and operational control with professional project 
managers to oversee major programmes.

Close communication with key customers and other stakeholders to explain the 
actions being taken and to understand and address their concerns.

Regular talent and performance reviews, supported by monitoring and 
communication with employees.

Customer concentration

Risks associated with large key accounts include over-
reliance on key customers, price pressure, customer default, 
and not achieving expected orders and benefits. 

Review customer and market concentration and pursue opportunities to diversify 
into new industries and regions.
Improve margin with existing key customers by leveraging best cost regions. 
Regular review and monitoring of key customers’ financial status, order book levels 
and trends. 
Strong relationships with key customers.

Margin erosion

The Group operates in highly competitive markets. This, 
combined with continued uncertain macro-economic 
conditions, could cause customers to accept lower cost 
competitors and substitute products leading to increased 
price pressure, margin erosion or lost business. 

Strong relationships with key customers, including ongoing review of product 
strategy, pricing and other demands. 

Operational transformation programme to leverage best cost manufacturing 
locations, driving margin improvements. 

Monitoring of competitors and potential new entrants into specific markets. 

Key to strategic objectives

Key to change in risk

Growth markets

Innovation

Globalisation

Culture

Up

No change

Down

26

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic
objective

Risk description
and context
Operational
Health and safety

Mitigation 
actions

Change 
in 2013

Inherent to our industry is the risk of incidents due to  
unsafe manufacturing processes or facilities causing  
injuries or fatalities to our people. 

Zero tolerance attitude for safety incidents at all levels of operations, with rules 
incorporated into operational procedures, safety manuals and all aspects of 
communication on safety. 
Health and Safety Committee responsible for company-wide best practice sharing, 
monitoring and improvements. 

Attract and retain talent

Our future success as we expand will be dependent 
upon our ability to attract and retain highly skilled and 
qualified employees.
We face risks in selecting, recruiting, training and retaining 
the people we need. 

IT delivery and support

The Group and operational management depend on timely, 
accurate and reliable information from software systems. 
Risks associated with the IT environment include failure to 
deliver IT projects on time and on budget, inadequate ERP 
controls and security, and lack of management information 
that could delay/impact decision making or service to our 
customers. The risk decreased during the year due to a 
reduced exposure to fragmented ERP suites, improved IT 
governance and IT security controls.

Supply chain reliance and costs

We rely upon a small number of core vendors for a high 
percentage of our materials requirements. Some of our 
needs may only be available from a limited number of these 
vendors. There is potential risk in terms of supply and price 
fluctuations driven by commodity price changes. The Group 
exposure increased during the year with a few key suppliers 
experiencing business continuity challenges.

Business continuity 

With many key manufacturing sites across the globe, 
our business is dependent on uninterrupted operations 
delivering high quality products. 

Laws and regulations
Product liability and contractual risk

We manufacture products that often operate in extreme 
environments where a serious incident arising from failure 
could result in liabilities for personal injury and/or damage 
to property, which in turn could have an impact on our 
reputation, particularly in the automotive sector. 

Legal and regulatory compliance

We operate in a large number of jurisdictions and, as a 
consequence, are subject to numerous domestic and 
international regulations. These include laws and regulations 
covering export control, anti-bribery and competition. 
Failure to comply could result in civil or criminal liabilities 
leading to significant fines and penalties or restrictions being 
placed upon our ability to trade resulting in reduced sales, 
profitability and reputational damage.

Financial
Financial risks

As an international business, the major financial risks 
faced by the Group are: foreign exchange risk, interest 
rate risk, credit risk, liquidity risk, commodity price risk and 
tax compliance.

Talent strategy and requirements regularly reviewed at Board and Operating 
Board level. 
Human resources share best practice across the Group to adapt recruitment and 
retention programmes to reflect changes in the labour market.
Regular reviews of development plans and opportunities, including 360° appraisal 
process and succession planning.
Remuneration Committee review of pay/bonus structures and ensuring competitive 
compensation plans and pensions are in place. 

The Group’s IT Steering Committee, chaired by the Group Chief Executive, meets on 
a regular basis to review all major IT projects.
Hardware and software are sourced from reputable suppliers.
Implementation of an up-to-date ERP solution is in progress. 
Appropriate disaster recovery plans are in place.

Monthly reviews of key data ensure that each of our businesses are kept fully 
informed of developments specific to commodity and precious metals pricing. 
Increased low cost sourcing will offset current risk. In addition, precious metal price 
hedging is undertaken on a non-deliverable basis, taking into account the forecast 
volume of purchases, forward precious metal prices and the cost of taking out cover.

All operating sites have documented business continuity plans in place with 
procedures to be implemented in case of an incident. 
Plans are tested on a regular basis to ensure they are fit for purpose. 
In certain instances, we have the ability to manufacture products over several 
manufacturing sites.

Comprehensive quality control procedures and appropriate levels of insurance are 
carried for key risks. 
Major contracts are reviewed by the Group Legal Counsel and we work continuously 
to build and maintain relationships with all key stakeholders. Group guidelines on 
acceptable levels of contractual liability are reinforced by legal and regulatory risk 
training specific to each division’s business and geographical needs.

Robust control framework. A cross-division export compliance group is 
embedded in the business, supported by the Group Legal Counsel, with external 
adviser participation.
An anti-bribery programme is in place which includes risk assessment, policy, training, 
review and monitoring. 

Financial risks are managed by the Group’s Treasury department in close co-
operation with the Group’s business divisions and operating companies, under the 
oversight of a Tax and Treasury Committee which is chaired by the Group Finance 
Director. The responsibilities of the Group’s Tax and Treasury department include 
the monitoring of financial risks, management of cash resources, debt and capital 
structure management, approval of counterparties and relevant transaction limits, 
and oversight of all significant tax and treasury activities undertaken by the Group. 

27

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Our progress in 2013

Electrification 
improving efficiency

Integrating electronic control in automotive 
applications presents highly demanding design 
challenges, requiring experience in conventional 
and specialised PCB development to create 
mechatronic system solutions. Increasing the 
efficiency of the internal combustion engine is 
as high a priority for the automotive industry as 
many of the emerging advanced safety features. 
Saleri has developed a system to deliver efficiency gains, 
which involves replacing mechanical intercooling systems 
with intelligent, electronic solutions. 

The design team was challenged to deliver and control the 
power requirements in the harsh environment of the engine 
bay, which is also becoming increasingly smaller with every 
new generation of vehicle. As a result, it is necessary to 
integrate the control electronics alongside the mechanical 
element, driving the rise in mechatronics. The integration of 
electronic control in automotive applications is increasing 
rapidly, creating design challenges for automotive OEMs 
and their suppliers. 

Through its extensive experience in this field, TT Electronics 
is able to provide the design expertise needed by more 
manufacturers, to ensure the automotive supply chain 
is able to continue to meet those challenges.

IMS Research predicts that the average annual 
growth for intelligent power modules in transportation 
applications will be 13.5 per cent from 2012 
through 2016.

28

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcAreas of interest

Operating review

Financial review

+

+

See pages 30-39  
for more detail

See pages 40-41  
for more detail

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
i
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S

l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n
I
l

a
n
o
i
t
i
d
d
A

TT Electronics plc

Annual Report 2013

29

 
 
 
Strategic Report

Operating review

A year of strategic 
alignment and focus

Progress
We have made good progress in implementing our 
strategy. The newly formed Sensing and Control 
division is well positioned to take advantage of 
growth opportunities. Implementation of the 
Operational Improvement Plan creates a more efficient 
manufacturing footprint which, together with the new 
business opportunities and product innovation, will drive 
the business to sustainable double digit margins.

Geraint Anderson  
Group Chief Executive

12 March 2014

Shatish Dasani  
Group Finance Director

12 March 2014

Geraint 
Anderson,
Group Chief 
Executive

30

Shatish 
Dasani,
Group 
Finance 
Director

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcDuring 2013, we created the Sensing and 
Control business to bring together our relevant 
capabilities to better capture increasing market 
opportunities for high performance sensors 
and integrated control electronics. This has 
resulted in positive momentum with a number 
of our key customers and improved our 
ability to provide innovative solutions to our 
target markets. 

In 2014, our focus will be to drive profitable 
growth in the Sensing and Control business 
through investment in product innovation, 
productivity improvements and the pursuit 
of suitable acquisition opportunities aligned 
with our growth strategy.

We are excited to launch the new TT 
Electronics brand image in 2014, reflecting the 
transformation of the business and to position 
us for the next phase of our journey. Based on 
extensive research, we have developed a 
new brand strategy, reflecting our existing 
strengths and values, whilst reinvigorating 
the look of the business and putting in place 
platforms, including a new Group website, to 
better communicate our focus, capabilities 
and strengths to all our key stakeholders. 

Revenue £m 
600

555.5

509.6

476.9

532.2

463.5

500

400

300

200

100

0

09

10

11

12

13

Operating profit1 £m

28.7

28.7

30.2

24.9

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

6.4

09

10

11

12

13

Operating profit margin1 %

5.6

6.0

5.7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

4.5

1.4

09

10

11

12

13

Return on average capital employed2 %

Group overview
The first half of the year reflected the weaker 
order pattern seen during the last quarter of 
2012, as a result of a more challenging trading 
environment. However, the business performed 
well in the second half. The order book for 
the year showed a positive trend, providing 
encouragement for 2014.

We have continued to make good progress 
in developing our position in markets 
that present the greatest opportunity 
and have strengthened our relationships 
with key customers. 

We have successfully established the Sensing 
and Control business to unify and build on 
our existing strengths. Together with the 
Operational Improvement Plan, this will drive 
growth and productivity improvements, and 
enable us to achieve the target of sustainable 
double digit margins. The Operational 
Improvement Plan has an overall exceptional 
cost of approximately £30 million over three 
years, with projected efficiency savings 
of approximately £8.0 million per annum 
from the second half of 2015. As previously 
announced, a number of one-off operational 
inefficiencies occurred during the year, and will 
continue through 2014. These arose due to the 
phased transfer of production, high inventory 
build and the doubling up of production costs 
over the implementation period.

The projected costs and benefits of the 
Operational Improvement Plan by constituent 
part are shown below:

20

15

10

5

0

2.4

09

17.9

18.8

15.7

12.4

10

11

12

13

European restructuring

North American restructuring

Sales offices

Net cash/(debt) £m

60

30

0

-30

-60

46.7

26.9

15.2

(9.9)

(56.9)

09

10

11

12

13

Earnings per share1 pence

12

9

6

3

0

-3

11.4

11.9

14.2

9.0

(1.2)
09

10

11

12

13

1 Stated before exceptional items
2 Defined as operating profit before exceptional items divided by average capital employed

Exceptional cost £m Projected annual benefit £m

25.1

2.5

2.4

30.0

6.0

0.7

1.3

8.0

31

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Operating review continued

Group overview (continued) 
We continue to improve our international 
operational footprint, through expansion in 
best cost regions to drive profitability and 
support our global customers. 

As part of the Operational Improvement 
Plan, we announced our intention to relocate 
manufacturing operations from Werne, 
Germany, and Fullerton, USA, to best cost 
locations. In parallel, we continue to invest 
in our German facilities, building on existing 
engineering strengths and customer 
relationships. Furthermore, we are transferring 
sensor and resistor production from our 
Fullerton operations in California to our 
Mexicali facility in Mexico. The relocation of 
our connectors and harnessing manufacturing 
business from Smithfield, USA to facilities 
in Perry, USA, and Abercynon, UK, has also 
been completed.

In line with our strategy to develop innovative 
new products and to build stronger customer 
relationships, we have continued to develop 
our engineering capability, increasing 
headcount in the Sensing and Control division 
by 64 per cent during the year. The acquisition 
of the joint venture in India was completed 
in 2013 and the new engineering centre in 
India has grown significantly in size, following 
investment in additional resources. We are 
also increasing our investment in the Centre 
of Excellence for Research & Development, 
new product innovation and sales in Werne, 
Germany, building on established engineering 
expertise and strong customer relationships.

Within our Sensing and Control business, our 
focus on quality, responsiveness and innovative 
solutions enabled us to grow revenue by 
6.1 per cent on an underlying basis during the 
year, with key customer wins at Daimler, BMW, 
VW and ZKW. We also saw growth in China 
through new business with local indigenous 
car manufacturers. 

The continued diversification of customers 
and growth in target markets saw Integrated 
Manufacturing Services (IMS) revenue 
increase by 15.9 per cent compared to 
2012 on an underlying basis, excluding the 
effect of the ACW acquisition and foreign 
exchange movement. Over £30 million of new 
business was shipped in 2013, with customers 
including Thales, Cassidian and Cobham, 
amongst others. 

Within our IMS business we established a new 
manufacturing facility in Timisoara, Romania, 
in order to provide a more balanced global 
manufacturing footprint to our customers. 
This facility is located on the same campus as 
the Sensing and Control operation. In addition, 
we closed the IMS Malaysia facility and 
fully integrated the ACW acquisition in line 
with the integration plan. Once completed, 
these actions will position the business for 
future growth with key customers, providing 
a valuable Eastern European footprint for 
the division. 

Components revenue fell by 8.7 per cent year 
on year on an underlying basis, reflecting the 
challenging market conditions and the poor 
performance of the Connectors business in the 
USA. Resistors experienced a difficult start to 
the year but finished strongly.

As part of our active programme to identify 
targets that complement our organic growth, 
during 2013 we evaluated a number of 
potential acquisition candidates against a 
set of clear commercial and financial criteria. 
We are particularly focused on pursuing 
selective acquisitions that broaden our Sensing 
and Control product offering and expand 
its market presence, particularly in the truck, 
off-road, industrial and aerospace segments. 
Whilst we were very close to agreeing terms 
with one target, ultimately that transaction did 
not complete and the associated costs incurred 
are set out as part of Exceptional items on 
page 95. Whilst this was disappointing, we 
continue to actively pursue a pipeline of 
acquisition opportunities.

Market environment 
Unfavourable macro-economic environment 
conditions, economic concerns in the USA, 
Euro zone uncertainty and the slowdown 
of growth in China first experienced in the 
latter part of 2012, all continued into early 
2013. From an end markets perspective, this 
resulted in a slow start to the year across 
all our divisions, especially Components. 
As economic stability returned to the USA, 
expectations around growth in China 
tempered and the outlook improved for 
Euro zone growth, confidence rebounded and 
led to improvements in industrial production 
throughout the year.

32

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcDividend
In view of the progress made in 2013, and 
the Board’s continued confidence in the 
Group’s financial position and future prospects, 
the Board is pleased to recommend a final 
dividend of 3.8 pence which, when combined 
with the interim dividend of 1.6 pence, gives 
a total of 5.4 pence per share for the full year 
(2012: 5.0 pence per share), representing an 
increase of 8 per cent. This will be paid on 
5 June 2014 to shareholders on the register 
at 23 May 2014.

Group outlook
Increased investment in product innovation 
and sales and the relocation of manufacturing 
to our best cost facilities are key steps in our 
broader strategy to become more competitive 
and increase market penetration. Whilst they 
will take time to implement and will have 
a short-term impact on operating margin 
progression, these strategic developments 
represent a significant step forward for the 
Group and, combined with our strong order 
book, provide confidence as we enter 2014.

Financial Performance
Revenue
Group revenue of £532.2 million from 
continuing operations increased by 
11.6 per cent (2012: £476.9 million). On an 
underlying basis, revenue increased by 4.9 per 
cent, excluding the effects of foreign exchange 
(£12.6 million) and the acquisition of ACW 
Technologies in December 2012. 

Operating profit
We continued to focus on product 
management, productivity improvements 
from our operational excellence programmes 
and investment to improve the underlying 
cost base. This resulted in an operating 
profit from continuing operations, before 
exceptional items, of £30.2 million, an 
increase of £1.5 million (2012: £28.7 million). 
Sensing and Control reported operating profit 
of £17.3 million compared to £16.6 million 
in 2012. Whilst revenue was higher for 
the division, profitability was held back by 
investments in engineering, new product 
development and improvements in operational 
efficiency arising from the move of production 
lines to Romania.

IMS operating profit was £8.8 million 
compared to £6.2 million in 2012, on the 
back of a 15.9 per cent underlying increase 
in revenue and the benefits of the ACW 
acquisition. Components operating profit 
was £4.1 million compared to £5.9 million in 
2012. This was driven by decreased revenue of 
8.7 per cent, in part offset by cost reductions. 

Strong cash generation and improved working 
capital flows in the last quarter resulted in a net 
cash position of £26.9 million at 31 December 
2013. This balance sheet strength, together 
with the availability of substantial committed 
debt facilities, allows us to continue to 
invest organically in the business through 
new product development and operational 
improvements. We will supplement this by 
pursuing selected acquisition opportunities 
within Sensing and Control to accelerate 
growth in target markets and expand our 
range of technologies. 

33

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Operating review continued

Sensing and Control

The division provides sensing and control 
solutions, including speed, position, 
temperature, accelerator pedal, optical 
and pressure sensors, together with 
microcircuits and intelligent power modules 
for critical applications which require high 
levels of expertise, precision and reliability. 
These solutions often operate in extremely 
harsh environments. We are focused on 
markets where our ability to meet such 
requirements helps our customers to compete 
and win. The division’s principal operations 
are located in Germany, Austria, Romania, 
India, China and Mexico and are supported 
by additional engineering and development 
teams in the USA and UK. With a sales 
presence in all major markets, the division 
is well positioned to serve our global 
customer base. 

Strategy
We target growing market sectors with 
underlying drivers which are aligned with 
our ability to create value based on our 
leading technology and engineering 
expertise. We work closely with our customers, 
anticipating their needs, turning ideas and 
technology into differentiated solutions. 
These sensing and control solutions form 
the heart of critical systems which improve 
safety, performance and emissions, helping 
our customers to be more competitive and 
to address increasing levels of regulation and 
legislation. A key differentiator is the division’s 
ability to deliver high performance solutions 
that work reliably, every time, in extremely 
harsh environments.

Target markets include transportation, 
industrial, aerospace, defence and medical, 
where we build long-term strategic 
partnerships with leading blue chip global 
companies. With a strong position in the 
transportation market, we have increased our 
effort to grow in other market sectors through 
focused sales initiatives and investment in 
new product development, leading to a more 
balanced portfolio. The division is embedding 
a culture of continuous improvement and uses 
TTotal Business Excellence to ensure common 
core processes and standards across all of its 
operations and functions. Our Operational 
Improvement Plan announced in June 2013 
will position our operational capabilities in best 
cost regions, creating an optimal footprint and 
delivering ongoing productivity improvements. 

Progress
During 2013, revenue increased by 6.1 per cent 
year on year at constant exchange rates 
and we saw a high level of order bookings, 
especially in the second half. We experienced 
growth in all key markets, driven by improved 
demand from key customers and new products. 
Revenues from China grew substantially as 
our focus on increasing business in this region 
gained momentum. Operating profit before 
exceptional items increased by £0.7 million 
to £17.3 million, but margins were affected 
by the transfer of product lines to Romania, 
the investment in the engineering centre in 
India and higher demand for some end of 
life products which operate on lower margins. 
In addition, we experienced some supplier 
volatility and price competition. Although this 
was offset by cost control to some extent, 
overall it had a short-term impact on our margin 
in 2013. 

The division’s global footprint, technology and 
strong customer relationships have resulted 
in significant new business wins and an 
increasing level of new business opportunities. 
These successes have been facilitated by new 
product developments, including a new speed 
sensor product range, pedal throttle controls, 
high temperature sensors, industrial position 
sensors and intelligent power modules, along 
with an increase in opportunities in China, India 
and Korea. Growth continued with our strategic 
OEMs in Germany, complemented by strong 
growth from new opportunities. 

The continued enhancement of the product 
portfolio remains a critical focus to ensure 
that our development plans accurately align 
with emerging customer needs. As part 
of this process, we implemented a project 
portfolio management tool which provides 
a standardised process and framework for 
effectively managing and prioritising the 
portfolio of development projects, market 
opportunities and associated investments. 
We continue to investigate opportunities, 
both organic and through acquisition, to 
expand our product range and technology 
capabilities. As announced in January 2014, 
we are increasing investment in research and 
development, new product innovation and sales 
capabilities in Germany as part of our strategy 
to further develop this centre of excellence, 
leveraging its existing engineering expertise and 
building on our customer relationships. 

Revenue £m 

272.3

259.6

285.2

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

11

12

13

Operating profit1 £m

16.2

16.6

17.3

20

15

10

5

0

11

12

13

Year end headcount2 number

2,462

2,509

2500

2000

1500

1000

500

0

12

13

Operating profit margin1 %

5.9

6.4

6.1

8

6

4

2

0

11

12

13

Return on capital employed1, 2 %

13.0

12.7

15

12

9

6

3

0

12

13

1 Before exceptional items
2  Data for 2011 not readily available for new 
organisational structure implemented during 2013

34

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcDelta Group

We have continued to develop the division’s 
global footprint into emerging regions. 
22 product lines have been established in 
the Romanian facility which opened in 2012. 
More significantly, the business announced an 
Operational Improvement Plan in June 2013 
to accelerate an improvement in operational 
efficiency and productivity, including 
greater focus on best cost manufacturing 
operations. As part of these plans, the transfer 
of production from Fullerton, California, to 
Mexicali, Mexico, was announced in August 
2013, with the move of production lines from 
Werne, Germany, to facilities in best cost 
regions announced in January 2014. 

The division is continuing to see operating 
efficiencies from the enterprise resource 
planning systems being put in place in all of our 
facilities. We are also increasing the skills of our 
workforce through training programmes, with 
increasing numbers of people participating 
in Six Sigma yellow, green and black belt 
programmes. We are continuing to implement 
our TTotal Business Excellence process to 
ensure that common processes enable us to 
operate to one global standard in all of our 
functions and facilities. In addition, we have 
placed talented individuals in our emerging 
regions, reflecting our growing manufacturing 
presence in these locations and their strategic 
importance to the business. These initiatives 
are supported by several recent key 
appointments within the division, including a 
new Senior Vice President Operations and a 
Vice President Global R&D. 

Significant progress has also been made in 
India during the year, where we successfully 
acquired the remaining interest in our Indian 
joint venture and relocated it to a new 
facility in Manesar. We also expanded the 
recently opened Group engineering centre in 
Bangalore, increasing our engineering capacity 
with 84 engineers in place by the end of 2013.

The division’s principal competitors include 
divisions of Bosch, Continental, CTS, Hella 
and Sensata.

Markets
Market demand for the top three German 
automotive OEMs grew during 2013 as the 
premium car market outperformed other 
sectors, due to continuing strong demand 
for passenger cars in Russia, Asia and North 
America. However, global demand for certain 
of the smaller European automotive OEMs 
significantly decreased. Despite a contraction 
in the truck market, which was particularly 
impacted by the uncertain economic 
environment in Europe, our business in this 
area grew by 15 per cent. Industrial markets 
began the year relatively slowly, but recovered 
slightly in the second half as market outlook 
indicators returned to growth positions and 
analysts forecasted improved economic 
conditions in 2014. Long-term market 
indicators continue to support the proliferation 
of sensing and control products, together 
with further development and expansion of 
more sophisticated solutions in our target 
market sectors. 

The Optoelectronics 
business unit within our 
Sensing and Control division 
has a long-term relationship 
with Delta Group, a leading 
global manufacturer of 
energy management 
systems. The success of 
this relationship has led 
to Optoelectronics being 
invited to develop a new, 
high-end customised optical 
sensor for Delta’s next 
generation of products.

Performance
Underlying revenue for the year increased 
by 6.1 per cent to £285.2 million, excluding 
a foreign exchange credit of £9.8 million, 
primarily as a result of the impact of 
foreign exchange, increased demand, 
and new business wins. Operating profit 
before exceptional items for the year 
was £17.3 million (2012: £16.6 million), 
giving an operating margin of 6.1 per cent 
(2012: 6.4 per cent).

Outlook
We expect modest growth from the top 
three German automotive OEMs in 2014 
as demand in emerging regions tempers 
slightly. With the general improvement and 
stabilisation of global outlook, we expect 
the level of capital equipment expenditure 
to increase slightly, providing favourable 
conditions for growth in our industrial 
businesses. The growth in revenue will be 
partly offset by the discontinuance of low 
margin business. The business will remain 
focused on successfully driving execution of 
the Operational Improvement Plan which will 
lead to one-off operational inefficiencies in 
2014 due to the phased transfer of production, 
higher inventory build and the doubling 
up of production costs for a period of time. 
We will maintain our emphasis on driving 
productivity and efficiency using our TTotal 
Business Excellence disciplines. Efforts to 
increasingly diversify our business in other 
market sectors and expand our technology 
and product portfolio range will continue 
to be a high priority.

35

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Operating review continued

Integrated Manufacturing 
Services (IMS)

The division draws on design engineering 
capabilities, global facilities and world-
class quality standards to provide highly 
complex electronic manufacturing solutions 
to customers in the aerospace, defence, 
medical, and high technology industrial 
sectors. We have a broad range of capabilities, 
from printed circuit board assembly to 
environmental testing and full systems 
integration. This suite of end-to-end solutions 
is focused exclusively on low volume, high 
mix business.

We support customers with a solid 
infrastructure of global electronics 
manufacturing skills and experience in complex 
assembly technologies, combined with local 
support from manufacturing operations in 
China, USA and Europe. 

Strategy
The division’s strategy is to engage with 
customers looking for a long-term partner 
to build and support highly engineered 
electronics and electromechanical assemblies, 
throughout their entire product lifecycle and 
across multiple geographic regions. Our global 
presence, complemented by local engineering 
and customer support, is a key differentiator. 
Our approach is executed exclusively within 
a low volume, high mix production model 
designed for flexibility and agility. 

Progress
The division performed well during 
2013, despite difficult market conditions. 
New business growth exceeded £30 million, 
with additional incremental growth attained 
through the acquisition and integration 
of ACW. Key wins, specifically within the 
aerospace market, have further validated 
our strategy for growth whilst operational 
investments in capital and quality systems 
have underpinned our ability to provide 
leading edge manufacturing solutions. 

In April 2013, the division was awarded 
Meggitt PLC’s 2013 Supplier Excellence 
Award. This prestigious award was presented 
at Meggitt’s 2013 European Supplier 
Conference in Bournemouth, UK, to recognise 
our excellence in business support and 
commitment to quality, in our role as a 
preferred supplier throughout 2012. See page 
39 for further details.

In May and August, we expanded our cable 
harness and interconnect offerings through the 
consolidation of operations and technologies 
from New Chapel Electronics Limited in the 
UK and AB Interconnect Inc. in the USA. 
The assimilation of these complementary 
capabilities, paired with the existing cable 
harness technologies in our China facility, 
increases our competitive position in key 
markets. With plans for ongoing integration of 
specialised capabilities across our facilities, our 
customers continue to benefit from our global 
footprint and an enhanced value offering.

Achieving world-class quality standards 
remains a key focus, and our ongoing pursuit of 
the most prestigious accreditations continues 
to serve as an important differentiator. 
In 2012, the division made history as the 
first company in China, and only the fifth 
worldwide, to receive Nadcap accreditation for 
both printed circuit board assembly (AC7120) 
and cable harness assembly (AC7121). 
In 2013, both our UK and USA facilities also 
achieved the Nadcap aerospace and defence 
quality accreditation for printed circuit board 
assemblies (AC7120).

146.6

8.8

Revenue £m 

106.4

107.7

150

120

90

60

30

0

11

12

13

Operating profit1 £m

10

8

6

4

2

0

6.2

5.0

11

12

13

Year end headcount2 number

2000

1500

1000

500

0

1,664

1,272

12

13

Operating profit margin1 %

8

6

4

2

0

5.8

6.0

4.7

11

12

13

Return on capital employed1, 2 %

33.2

28.2

35

28

21

14

7

0

12

13

1 Before exceptional items
2  Data for 2011 not readily available for new 
organisational structure implemented during 2013

36

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcMeggitt

In April 2013 the IMS 
division was awarded 
Meggitt PLC’s 2013 
Supplier Excellence 
Award. Presented at 
Meggitt’s 2013 European 
Supplier Conference, 
this prestigious award 
recognises IMS’ excellence 
in business support and 
our commitment to quality 
throughout 2012.

IMS facilities now account for three of 
only 49 companies worldwide holding 
Nadcap printed circuit board assembly 
accreditation. These achievements 
demonstrate our execution of an ongoing 
global quality roadmap designed to 
meet the needs of customers in the high 
reliability, high technology, aerospace sector. 
The accreditations continue to enable us to win 
strategic new business, including in the Chinese 
commercial aerospace market. See page 14 for 
further details.

We made significant progress in the 
development and integration of 
manufacturing operations during 2013. 
The ACW acquisition was integrated into the 
business, and we completed the planned exit 
of the Southampton facility in April 2013. 
Our sub-scale Malaysian facility was closed 
in June 2013, with operations consolidated 
into our facility in China. We also established 
a facility in the Group’s Romanian campus 
to further expand our best cost footprint 
in Europe. 

The division’s principal competitors include 
Asteel Flash, Neways, OnCore and Plexus.

Markets
In 2013, conditions in our target markets 
remained challenging, although there were 
signs of marked improvement as we finished 
the year. The division saw particular success 
within the aerospace and defence markets, as 
we continued to expand our customer base 
through our global manufacturing footprint 
and by enhancing our value proposition 
through the integration from specialised 
capabilities and quality standards.

Performance
Revenue for the year was £146.6 million 
(2012: £107.7 million), representing underlying 
growth of 15.9 per cent excluding the effect of 
the ACW business acquired in December 2012 
and foreign exchange. Operating profit before 
exceptional items improved from £6.2 million 
in 2012 to £8.8 million in 2013 due to the 
increased revenue and the contribution from 
ACW. Operating margins improved from 
5.8 per cent to 6.0 per cent, entering our target 
range for the business. 

Outlook
We anticipate making additional progress 
during 2014, further strengthening our 
competitive position in key markets. 
Production is planned to ramp up in Romania, 
establishing it as a key centre for the division. 

37

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Operating review continued

Components

The Components division comprises our 
Resistors, Power and Hybrid, Magnetics, 
and Connectors businesses. Each of these 
businesses operate with their own leadership 
structure to manage global sales, operations 
and research and development, allowing a 
greater focus on success in their respective 
product sets. We serve customers in the 
industrial, automotive, aerospace, defence and 
medical markets and focus on creating value 
by delivering innovative electronic solutions. 
Our engineered component solutions include 
fixed and variable resistor products, magnetics, 
connectors, power modules and control 
circuitry for multiple applications. 

Strategy
The division targets markets with underlying 
growth drivers where we can create value 
based on our leading technology and 
engineering expertise. We work closely 
with our customers, anticipating their 
needs, turning ideas and technology into 
differentiated solutions for specific applications. 
We concentrate on increasing the pace of new 
product introduction through improvements in 
product management and on delivering wide 
ranging operational improvements, making it 
easier for customers to do business with us.

Progress
The Components division was affected 
by lower demand in the first half of 2013, 
particularly for industrial resistors and 
connectors for military markets, and we 
therefore took actions to manage costs and 
overheads during this period. Despite the slow 
start to the year, improved market conditions 
in the second half, coupled with ongoing 
cost management activities and efficiency 
improvements, resulted in a significantly better 
performance in the second half. 

In the Resistors business, we continued to 
invest in new product introductions, including 

the new, dedicated research and development 
facility in Corpus Christi, USA, for resistor 
products which we announced in 2012. 
Designed to increase the pace of development 
for new resistor technologies, this facility 
significantly increases our capacity to develop, 
test and commercialise new resistor products 
for our customers. The first major new product 
line developed at Corpus Christi will launch 
in 2014, with further launches scheduled 
to follow. 

An increase in resistor production in Mexicali, 
Mexico, occurred during the year, following 
the closure of the Boone, North Carolina, site, 
with operational performance and customer 
service levels both improving. Capacity at the 
Mexicali facility increased by 67 per cent to 
100,000 sq ft and now provides the Group 
with a North American best cost centre of 
excellence, in line with our strategy to align our 
footprint with key customers and to improve 
competitiveness and margins. Further efforts 
to streamline the resistor product business were 
made through end of life announcements for 
products manufactured in our USA facilities 
in Fullerton, California, and Smithfield, South 
Carolina. This will reduce the number of 
production facilities to five globally.

Our Power and Hybrid business is focused on 
developing application-specific micro circuits 
and power modules for aerospace and defence 
applications. Following a challenging start 
to the year, a new management structure 
enabled us to take steps in the second 
half to significantly improve the operating 
performance of the business. This resulted in 
an increase in profitability and a strong close 
to the year. During 2013 the business secured 
a significant award of new defence related 
business from a major international customer 
and was awarded “Supplier of the Year” by one 
of our key customers, Aero Engine Controls 
(part of Rolls-Royce plc). 

Revenue £m 

200

150

100

50

0

130.9

109.6

100.4

11

12

13

Operating profit1 £m

7.5

5.9

4.1

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

11

12

13

Year end headcount2 number
2000

1,647

1,595

1500

1000

500

0

12

13

Operating profit margin1 %

8

6

4

2

0

5.7

5.4

4.1

11

12

13

Return on capital employed1, 2 %

20

15

10

5

0

16.7

11.3

12

13

1 Before exceptional items
2  Data for 2011 not readily available for new 
organisational structure implemented during 2013

38

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcAEC

Through our operating 
company Semelab Ltd, our 
Power and Hybrid business 
unit was presented with 
the annual Best Electronics 
Supplier award for 2012 by 
Aero Engine Controls (AEC), 
part of the Rolls-Royce 
Group. Semelab emerged 
as the clear winner with 
a 100 per cent record 
for on time delivery over 
a period of 24 months 
and no quality issues for 
20 months.

The Connectors business completed a 
significant restructuring programme during 
the second half of 2013, to re-size the 
business and increase focus on the delivery 
of harsh environment connector and 
interconnect solutions to the military, rail and 
select industrial segments. This programme 
included closing down the facility in North 
America. These actions, together with 
the successful completion of a major new 
product development programme, have 
put the business on a sound footing as 
we enter 2014.

We also established a self-contained Magnetics 
business during 2013. This new organisation, 
which includes management, sales and 
operations functions, has led to increased focus 
and accountability that will better provide for 
future success. 

The division’s principal competitors include 
Amphenol, Koa, Semikron and Vishay.

Markets
Prevailing economic conditions and the 
reduction in defence spending resulted in 
a slow start to the year. However, general 
economic stability and improved market 
conditions in the second half resulted 
in an improvement in demand from 
industrial customers.

Performance 
Revenue for 2013 was £100.4 million 
(2012: £109.6 million), a reduction of 
8.7 per cent on an underlying basis, due to 
the slow start to the year across the division 
and the poor performance of the Connectors 
business. This performance was partially offset 
by a strong second half. 

Operating profit before exceptional items for 
the year was £4.1 million (2012: £5.9 million), 
down by £1.8 million year on year. This was 
primarily caused by reduced revenue and the 
performance of our US connectors business. 
Cost saving measures implemented during 
the year and better trading in the second half 
mean that the business is better positioned as 
it enters 2014. Operating margin in 2013 was 
4.1 per cent (2012: 5.4 per cent).

Outlook
Based on the actions taken in the second half 
of 2013, more stable market conditions and 
a stronger order book, we expect to deliver 
growth and improved profitability in 2014.

39

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Financial review

Revenue for the year increased overall by 
11.6 per cent to £532.2 million. This included 
the benefit of the ACW Technology 
business acquired in December 2012 and 
favourable foreign exchange movements; the 
underlying growth excluding these factors 
was 4.9 per cent. Operating profit before 
exceptional items increased by £1.5 million 
to £30.2 million compared with £28.7 million 
in 2012. Operating margin however declined 
from 6.0 per cent to 5.7 per cent reflecting 
investments made to position the business for 
future growth (in particular within Sensing and 
Control), lower volumes in the Components 
division and a poor performing connectors 
and harnessing business in the USA which 
was closed during the year. 

Profit before tax and exceptional items 
increased by £4.2 million to £29.5 million 
benefiting from net foreign exchange gains on 
currency borrowings through the interest line 
and also lower bank interest costs.

Headline earnings per share increased by 
19.3 per cent to 14.2 pence due to higher 
profits and benefits of a lower tax rate (as 
described in more detail below, under the 
heading “Taxation”).

The Group has a clear strategy to improve 
performance and deliver shareholder value. 
The main financial key performance indicators 
used to measure progress are set out on pages 
22 and 23.

Net finance costs
Net finance costs for 2013 were £0.7 million  
compared to £3.4 million in 2012. 
Included within this amount is £1.5 million 
(2012: £1.2 million) in respect of the net 
interest expense arising on pension scheme 
net liabilities, £0.2 million (2012: £0.8 million) 
in respect of the amortisation of loan 
arrangement fees and £1.7 million net credit 
(2012: £0.3 million net credit) resulting from 
retranslation of foreign currency borrowings. 
In 2012 net finance costs included £0.7 million 
in respect of the interest expense on the 
minority put option relating to a third party 
minority interest in one of the Group’s 
subsidiaries, which was exercised during 2013.

Taxation
The tax charge from continuing operations, 
excluding exceptional items, was £7.1 million 
(2012: £6.7 million), which represents 
an effective tax rate of 24.1 per cent 
(2012: 26.5 per cent) on continuing operations. 
The reduction in the effective tax rate reflects 
progress in optimising the Group’s tax position 
and increased focus on managing tax risks.

Earnings per share and dividends
Headline earnings per share from continuing 
operations was 14.2 pence, an increase 
of 19.3 per cent from 2012 (11.9 pence). 
Basic earnings per share from continuing 
operations was 8.8 pence (2012: 10.3 
pence), a reduction which was principally as 
a result of the increase in “Exceptional items” 
described below.

The Directors recommend a final dividend 
of 3.8 pence which together with the interim 
dividend of 1.6 pence gives a total dividend 
for the year of 5.4 pence per share (2012: 5.0 
pence), an increase of 8 per cent. This is in 
line with the Group’s policy of increasing 
dividends progressively whilst maintaining 
cover of at least two times underlying earnings 
per share. The final dividend will be paid on 
5 June 2014 to shareholders on the register at 
23 May 2014.

Exceptional items
The Group reports non-trading income or 
expenditure as exceptional when the size, 
nature or function of an item or aggregation 
of similar items is such that separate 
presentation is relevant to an understanding of 
its financial position. An exceptional charge of 
£11.2 million from continuing operations has 
been recognised during 2013, compared with 
an exceptional charge of £3.3 million for 2012, 
made up as follows:

£million

Negative goodwill

S & C Operational 
Improvement Plan

Other restructuring  
costs 

Closure of 
Boone facility

M & A costs 

Total

2013

0.4 

2012

0.3 

(3.1)

–

(5.9)

(1.1)

(1.2) 

(1.4)

(11.2)

(2.1)

(0.4)

(3.3) 

The exceptional items in 2013 relate to:

•	 the	Operational	Improvement	Plan	

which is a fundamental restructuring 
of the manufacturing footprint and 
sales organisation of the Sensing and 
Control division. The charge in 2013 of 
£3.1 million comprises:

  –    movement of production at our Fullerton 
facilities in California, USA, to Mexicali, 
Mexico: £0.3 million 

  –   closure of sales offices in France, Italy  

and Japan: £2.3 million

  –  consultancy costs: £0.5 million

40

•	 Other	restructuring	costs	of	£5.9	million	 

comprise:

  –   the closure of the loss making Connectors  

business in the USA: £2.0 million

  –   the planned closure and relocation of 

the ACW Technology facilities from 
Southampton to Wales: £1.1 million

  –   the transfer of production lines from 

Germany and Austria, and start-up costs 
in Romania: £1.3 million

  –   the relocation of production facilities in 

Malaysia by the IMS division: £0.5 million

  –   costs arising from the creation of the new 
organisation structure: £0.6 million

  –   costs incurred in securing certain supply 

chain activities: £0.4 million

•	 M&A	costs	of	£1.4	million	arising	from	the	
acquisition of ACW in December 2012 
and other costs for potential acquisitions 
and disposals.

•	 Additional	costs	of	£1.2	million	relating	to	
environmental clean-up costs of our Boone 
facility in North Carolina, USA.

Acquisitions
On 1 February 2013, the Group completed 
the acquisition of the 49 per cent minority 
interest in Padmini TT Electronics Private 
Limited for a consideration of £8.3 million cash. 
Deferred consideration of £0.5 million will be 
settled in 2014 as performance conditions 
were achieved.

In December 2012, the Group acquired the 
majority of the UK business and assets of 
ACW Technology Limited for a consideration 
of £3.1 million. The acquired business 
provides manufacturing services to leading 
global customers in the defence, aerospace 
and industrial markets and strengthens our 
position as one of the largest aerospace and 
defence CEMs in the UK. During 2013, the 
negative goodwill arising from the acquisition 
was increased by £0.4 million to £0.7 million 
and deferred consideration of £0.1 million 
was settled.

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcExceptional cash restructuring costs of 
£6.1 million were incurred, and a £3.9 million 
special payment to the UK pension fund 
was made.

Acquisitions and disposals comprise the 
acquisition of the 49 per cent minority interest 
in India, deferred consideration in respect of 
the ACW acquisition made in December 2012 
and a completion adjustment on the sale of 
Ottomotores in 2012.

The main financial covenants in the bank 
facility restrict net debt to below 2.75 times 
EBITDA before exceptional items. In addition, 
EBITDA before exceptional items is required 
to cover net finance charges by 4.0 times. 
The covenants are tested half-yearly on a 
rolling 12 month basis and were satisfied 
comfortably at 31 December 2013:

Net debt/
EBITDA before 
exceptional items

EBITDA before 
exceptional 
items/net 
finance charges

Covenant

December  
20131

< 2.75

(0.5)

> 4.00

(64.3)

1  based on EBITDA and net finance charges for the year 
ended 31 December 2013.

The Directors have assessed the future funding 
requirements of the Group and compared 
them with the level of available borrowing 
facilities and are satisfied that the Group has 
adequate resources for the foreseeable future. 

Pensions
The Group operates one significant defined 
benefit scheme in the UK and two overseas 
defined benefit schemes, in the USA and 
Japan. All of these schemes are closed to new 
members and the UK and USA schemes are 
closed to future accrual. 

The assets and liabilities of the Group’s defined 
benefit schemes are summarised below:

£million

Fair value of assets

Liabilities

2013

388.1

2012

382.5

(407.9)

(416.2)

Deficit – UK scheme

(19.8)

(33.7)

Overseas schemes

(0.7)

(3.1)

Total Group deficit

(20.5)

(36.8)

The triennial valuation of the UK scheme as 
at April 2013 showed a deficit of £19.1 million 
compared with £39.4 million at April 2010, 
representing a funding level of 96 per cent 
compared with 89 per cent previously. It was 
agreed with the Trustee that the existing 
recovery plan is sufficient to address the deficit; 
contributions of £3.9 million were paid during 
the year and will increase by £0.2 million each 
year to £4.5 million in 2016. In addition, the 
Company has set aside £3.0 million over the 
last three years to be utilised in agreement with 
the Trustee for reducing the long-term liabilities 
of the scheme.

In the year ending 31 December 2013, 
revisions to IAS 19 ‘Employee benefits’ have 
become effective leading to a change in the 
calculation of net interest expense on the 
pension scheme deficit and also the charging 
of administration expenses to operating profit 
rather than as a deduction to the expected 
return on pension scheme assets. This change 
in assumption was adopted with effect from 
1 January 2012 and the figures shown in the 
report are therefore on a like for like basis. 
The impact for 2012 was to increase finance 
costs by £1.4 million and reclassify £0.7 million 
of pension administration costs from net 
Finance costs to Administrative expenses 
within operating profit.

Cash flow, borrowings and facilities
As at 31 December 2013 the Group cash 
position was £26.9 million compared to 
£46.7 million at the beginning of the year. 
The main movements are outlined below.

£million 
(unless otherwise stated)

Underlying operating 
cash flow*

Working capital 
(outflow)/
improvement*

Capital expenditure 
(including software)

Exceptional costs

Acquisitions 
and disposals

Stock turns (times)*

Debtor days*

Creditor days*

2013

2012

45.5

45.4

(6.7)

(3.5)

(24.5)

(20.0)

(6.1)

(4.1)

(12.4)

34.3

5.7

40

63

5.6

39

57

*  Relates to continuing operations and before 
£2.7 million increase in working capital arising from 
the Operational Improvement Plan.

Underlying operating cash flow from 
continuing operations for 2013 was 
£45.5 million, marginally higher than 2012. 
The cash outflow from working capital was 
£6.7 million, compared to a cash outflow 
of £3.5 million in 2012 and was largely 
attributable to the build-up of inventory 
within the IMS division due to an increase 
in the level of committed customer orders 
in the last quarter of 2013 and additional 
volumes from the ACW business transferred 
into Suzhou. An increase in our Sensing and 
Control division of £2.7 million as a result 
of the implementation of the Operational 
Improvement Plan has been excluded from 
underlying cash flow. 

Trade working capital represented 
14 per cent of sales at 31 December 2013 
(2012: 14 per cent). Working capital balances 
continued to be actively monitored and 
managed, with debtor days at a healthy 
40 days and creditor days of 63 days. 
Stock turns increased from 5.6 turns to 
5.7 turns.

41

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Corporate responsibility

Our Corporate 
Responsibility policy

With global organisations facing significant business and political 
challenges and risks in a changing world, corporate responsibility (“CR”) 
assists in ensuring good and responsive management. Within TT 
Electronics, we manage our business responsibly and sustainably in 
accordance with the expectations of our multiple stakeholders, helping 
us attract and retain the best people whilst promoting our corporate 
reputation. We understand CR as a dynamic discipline to manage the 
risks and maximise opportunities of an increasingly global corporation.

Our CR agenda covers issues identified as 
having the greatest potential to affect the 
long-term sustainability of the Group, by 
directly impacting our reputation or ability 
to operate. As an electronics manufacturer 
with customers and operations around the 
world, our global CR policy focuses primarily 
on the four key areas identified below, which 
are material to our long-term performance, 
supplemented at a local level by CR 
programmes designed to address local issues:

•	 Workplace	–	Investing	in	the	development	
of skills, health and safety and motivating 
our employees to create a more 
sustainable business;

•	 Marketplace	–	Improving	the	environmental	
performance and impact of our suppliers to 
better serve our customers;

•	 Environment	–	Improving	the	environmental	
impact of our operations and the efficiency 
of our products; and

•	 Community	–	Engaging	with	the	

communities within which we operate.

We have global frameworks in place for 
the areas of Workplace, Marketplace and 
Environment, whilst also allowing local 
businesses the flexibility to determine those 
areas on which to focus and to tailor their 
own approach. The fourth area, Community, 
is driven predominantly by local issues. 
This enables the businesses to support causes 
relevant to their location. 

In addition to these core areas of focus, our 
new brand identity has been designed to 
reflect our expectation of both internal and 
external behaviours, including the conduct 
of relationships with suppliers and in the 
workplace, which are critical to our reputation.

The Corporate and Social Responsibility 
Committee, chaired by the Group Chief 
Executive, is responsible for defining 
our strategic CR priorities, monitoring our  
CR performance and ensuring that 

our CR activity remains directly related 
to our overall business objectives. 

Electronic Industry Citizenship Coalition 
(EICC)
TT Electronics is a full member of the Electronic 
Industry Citizenship Coalition (EICC). The EICC 
is an alliance of the world’s leading electronics 
companies and members include Microsoft, 
Apple, Dell, Intel and HP. Membership of the 
EICC enables us to share and benefit from 
best practice and to work collectively with peer 
organisations on issues of common concern 
facing our industry. 

The vision of the EICC is to create a global 
supply chain that consistently operates 
with social, environmental and economic 
responsibility. To assist with progress towards 
the EICC vision, members adhere to a 
common Code of Conduct.

The Code of Conduct provides guidelines 
for performance and compliance in five 
critical areas:

•	 Environment

•	 Ethics

•	 Health	and	safety	

•	 Labour	

•	 Management	systems

The Code of Conduct establishes standards 
to ensure that working conditions are 
safe, that workers are treated with respect 
and dignity and that business operations 
are environmentally responsible and 
conducted ethically.

We have adopted the EICC’s Code of Conduct 
and embedded it throughout our operating 
companies. Through engagement with 
the EICC, we gain a better understanding 
of industry best practice and are able to 
respond proactively to the issues that affect 
our industry, particularly around our global 
supply chains.

42

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcEICC Code of Conduct survey results

85.6%

84.1%

82.0%

72.0%

77.9%

74.3%

75.3% 74.5%

77.7%

75.4%

71.1%

70.9%

87.0%

79.1%

77.9% 79.5%

73.7%

74.9%

69.6%

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

Abercynon – U K
Rogerstone – U K
Kuantan – M alaysia
S mithfield – U SA
Carrollton – U SA
Lutterw orth – U K
Fairford – U K
Bedington – U K
Suzhou – China
Timisoara – Ro m ania
Kingenberg – G erm any
Salzburg – Austria
W erne – G erm any
Fullerton –  U SA
Perry – U SA
M exicali – U SA
Juarez – M exico
Christ Church – Barbados
Corpus Christie – U SA

explanatory guide to the Act contained within 
our Worldwide Anti-Corruption and Bribery 
Policy. This Policy is reinforced with an on-line 
training programme.

Workplace:
Employees
We believe that our 5,768 employees are our 
key assets. 49.5 per cent are male and 50.5 
per cent are female. The table below provides 
a further breakdown: 

Employees  
(full time equivalent)

Main Board Directors

Senior managers 
(Operating Board 
members and their 
direct reports)

Austria

Barbados

China

Germany

India

Malaysia

Mexico

Romania

UK

USA

Male

Female

7

45

205

27

418

482

171

50

420

150

633

300

0

8

88

86

475

529

19

440

410

96

403

366

All employees

2,856

2,912

During 2013, in order to evaluate our 
adherence to the EICC Code of Conduct, all 
of our manufacturing facilities completed an 
EICC survey measuring performance and social 
practices, as well as the performance of social 
and environmental management systems. 
All sites demonstrated high levels of adherence 
to the Code of Conduct, leading to them 
all being assessed as either low or medium 
risk. The results are shown on a site-by-site 
basis above.

Strong business ethics form the basis for 
all of our relationships with employees, 
customers, partners, competitors and suppliers. 
Our Statement of Values and Business Ethics 
Code sets out the operating principles to which 
we adhere. 

One of TT Electronics’ competitive strengths 
is the fact that we are an ethical company, 
operating with integrity and to one standard 
worldwide. We do not tolerate corruption or 
bribery and we are committed to maintaining 
the fundamental principles of fairness, honesty 
and common sense, which are the heart of 
the Group’s philosophy, values and corporate 
standards. We operate effective systems and 
processes to counter corrupt practices including 
an anonymous reporting facility where 
individuals can notify us of concerns. 

As a UK listed company, we are bound by 
the laws of England and Wales, including the 
UK Bribery Act 2010 (the “Act”). This law is 
extra-territorial in scope, with broad application 
not only to British companies, citizens and 
residents, but also to all foreign companies 
doing business in the UK, regardless of whether 
the act or omission constituting bribery occurs 
in or outside the UK. All companies within 
the Group operate within the framework 
of the Act, as well as local laws which have 
direct effect. All employees have access to an 

43

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStrategic Report

Corporate responsibility continued

Creating a good working environment at all 
of our locations is of paramount importance. 
We strive to build a supportive, diverse and 
engaging workplace, whilst nurturing a high 
performance corporate culture, built around 
our core values. 

Human rights
TT Electronics is committed to upholding the 
human rights of our workers and to treating 
them with dignity and respect as understood 
by the international community. Our Human 
Rights Code is contained within the EICC Code 
of Conduct and covers all workers including 
permanent, temporary, migrant, student, 
contract, direct, indirect and other types of 
worker. Our Code details expected labour 
standards covering: freely chosen employment, 
child labour avoidance, working hours, wages 
and benefits, humane treatment, freedom of 
association and non-discrimination. The Group 
does not engage in discrimination based on 
race, colour, age, gender, sexual orientation, 
ethnicity, disability, pregnancy, religion, political 
affiliation, union membership or marital status 
in hiring or in employment practices such as 
promotions, rewards or access to training.

Training and development
We employ more than 5,700 people globally 
and will continue to invest in their training 
and development. We strongly believe in 
equipping our people with the skills to do their 
jobs effectively, encouraging them to develop 
to their full potential. TT Electronics provides a 
variety of tailored training and development 
opportunities. In 2013, the business units 
continued their Six Sigma training programmes 
with further development of black, yellow and 
green belts. Of our seven black belts, five are 
male and two are female.

During 2013, we continued the roll out 
of our global management development 
programme, “Aspire”. The aim of Aspire is 
to provide supervisors and managers with 
the fundamental skills for coaching their 
employees. In addition, during the year we 
initiated a tailored leadership development 
programme for 50 of our senior managers. 

Employee engagement 
An engaged workforce significantly enhances 
company performance. Engaged employees 
are more likely to perform well, promote 
our business and remain with us for longer. 
They are also more likely to enhance our 
relationships with our customers, stakeholders 
and the communities within which we operate.

Employee engagement begins with fostering 
a culture that is open, transparent and 
collaborative. At all levels, we are committed 
to encouraging a high degree of openness 
and equality which will continue to enhance 

our culture. Where possible, a number of our 
facilities have removed walls and offices in 
favour of an open plan environment.

We strive to maintain engagement of 
employees at all points from the application 
process to the retirement process. 
We approach every interaction with openness, 
honesty and integrity. Strong relationships 
built on trust are at the core of what we do. 
Collaboration across the Group and beyond 
assists our ability to gather important insights 
and ideas, improving the way we conduct our 
business and serve our customers.

In 2013, we continued to make significant 
progress to connect continually with our 
employees at all levels, and we see this 
as a critical component of engagement. 
Throughout the Group, we provide 
numerous open, transparent and two-way 
communication channels. Employees are 
provided with a wide range of communication 
tools to assist in their understanding of 
our goals and objectives. For example, all 
managers are encouraged to attend the 
quarterly webcast presented by the Group 
Chief Executive and Group Finance Director 
and to cascade pertinent messages to their 
teams. We use a variety of communication 
channels, including team briefings, suggestion 
schemes, employee forums and our 
global intranet.

Our intranet showcases a broad range of 
activities from across the Group. The CR section 
focuses on initiatives, employee achievements 
and charitable causes in which our people 
are involved, both through work and in the 
outside world. 

Managers and employees alike are 
encouraged to promote and live our corporate 
values, collectively making our people 
feel proud to be part of our organisation. 
During 2013, over 1,200 “Thank You” cards 
were issued through our global recognition 
programme “Inspire”, which acknowledges 
individual and team contributions through 
monthly recognition awards, quarterly 
exceptional awards and bi-annual Group Chief 
Executive awards.

Health and safety
We continued to make progress during 2013 in 
creating a working environment that supports 
the health, safety and well-being of our people. 
Whilst the total number of injuries reduced 
by five per cent during the year, our average 
headcount reduced by six per cent, resulting 
in a marginal increase in our three day or 
more absence per 1000 employees. In the 
first quarter of 2014, our facility in Malaysia 
accumulated three million working hours 
without an accident.

Marketplace:
Our social and environmental practices are 
important in embedding sustainability into 
our supply chain. We require our suppliers to 
ensure that their employees operate in a safe 
environment with a strong code of conduct 
and a culture which promotes effective 
business ethics. We also expect them to adhere 
to, and fully support, relevant legislation both 
globally and within their region. We adhere 
to EICC or relevant industry codes of conduct, 
such as ZVEI which represents the economic, 
technological and environmental policy 
interests of many of our European suppliers. 
We continue to work with our supply chain in 
terms of development and adherence to best 
practices. All major suppliers have completed 
EICC self-assessment questionnaires, or had 
EICC Risk Assessment (RA1) reviews carried out 
during 2013. We continue to work closely and 
directly with the EICC and our vendors in terms 
of ongoing assessment and development.

Environment:
TT Electronics strives to ensure that all facilities 
worldwide meet or exceed local and regional 
guidelines for environmental protection.

We are a registered participant in the UK’s 
Carbon Reduction Commitment (CRC) 
energy efficiency scheme. During 2013 we 
continued to consolidate our position in 
terms of optimised energy consumption 
and significantly improved our ranking in the 
published CRC league table of participants. 
We collect data monthly on the key carbon 
emission drivers from all of our manufacturing 
sites worldwide. In terms of other greenhouse 
gases (Methane, Nitrous Oxide, HFCs, PFCs 
and Sulphur Hexafluoride), during 2013 we 
monitored outputs from our manufacturing 
plants worldwide. These investigations 
revealed that the greenhouse gas emissions 
resulting from our operations are not material. 
Accordingly, these are reported under ‘Other 
statutory disclosures’ on page 74. Our process 
in terms of data collection and verification is 
auditable and robust.

All of our manufacturing plants employ precise 
monitoring and undertake regular reviews, 
with results regularly fed back to the Divisional 
leadership teams. We are seeking to analyse 
best use of renewable energy sources, and are 
actively considering localised wind generation 
and targeted solar arrays. We are also pursuing 
the extensive use of LED lighting in our 
manufacturing areas, and individual site trials 
are currently in progress.

44

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcOur UK smart metering programme was 
completed during 2013 and all our UK 
manufacturing sites now benefit from visibility 
of real time data with which to further 
monitor and manage their gas and electricity 
consumption. The use of real time information 
will improve data flow and allow for more 
effective targeting of areas for improvement. 
We continue to work with our energy provider 
to take advantage of its extensive web based 
targeting and monitoring information. All our 
UK manufacturing sites now actively engage 
in these processes as part of their energy 
reduction programmes.

During 2013 we extended our Carbon Trust 
Standard accreditation for a further two years 
following a successful audit in the UK.

Community:
Maintaining an open dialogue with our 
communities has allowed us to build positive 
and constructive relationships at the local level. 
Our employees are encouraged to become 
active members of their communities.

In order to encourage students to pursue 
rewarding careers in Science, Technology, 
Engineering and Mathematics (STEM) related 
areas, our IMS business hosted an event at 
its New Chapel Electronics (NCE) facility for 
aspiring engineers in Gloucestershire, UK. 
NCE has extensive experience in engineering 
design and manufacturing technology related 
to the aerospace and defence industry – an 
industry which provides 59,000 direct jobs 
in the South West of England alone.

The unique technologies and engineering 
expertise of NCE were shared with a group 
of students aged between 10 and 11 from 
Southrop Primary School. They enjoyed a tour 
around the NCE facility, where they observed 
a leading aerospace technology company in 
their own hometown. Highlights of the plant 
tour included a hands-on demonstration of 
the 3-D CAD (computer aided design) software 
used by NCE engineers and a tour of NCE’s 
in-house machine shop.

students aged between 10 and 11 from 
Southrop Primary School. They enjoyed a 
tour around the NCE facility

Students from Southrop Primary School on a tour 
around the New Chapel facility in the UK

As an organisation we believe that it is our 
responsibility to ensure that our activities 
support strong, thriving and diverse 
communities around the world. We aim to 
make a distinctive contribution to equality and 
social development by establishing effective 
partnerships and programmes that make best 
use of the energies and skills of our employees. 
We will continue to support our employees in 
fundraising for charities and voluntary work, 
recognising both the benefit to the community 
and to the employees themselves. We wish to 
put on record our thanks to all those who gave 
something back to their local communities 
during the year. 

A team of 22 people from our IMS division at 
Rogerstone set off on a 55 mile journey from 
Brecon to Cardiff Bay as part of our support 
for Macmillan

Geraint Anderson and Pat Murray with children 
from Anubandha, Bangalore

Employees at our research and development 
centre in Bangalore have continued their work 
with a non-profit organisation which aims to 
enrich the lives of underprivileged children 
in Bangalore and beyond through basic 
education, healthcare, and nourishment.

During a recent visit, Geraint Anderson and 
Pat Murray spent quality time with children 
from Anubandha over breakfast and presented 
them with school bags containing books, 
games and stationery. 

2013 was the inaugural year of our UK charity 
partnership with Macmillan Cancer Support. 
Macmillan is a national organisation but 
has strong ties and dealings within our local 
UK communities. 

Our employees have provided outstanding 
support to this charity over the last 12 months. 
Through fundraising and volunteering efforts, 
they have taken part in everything from bike 
rides to marathons, organised raffles and 
cake bakes, dressed up and dressed down. 
The work and energy that our employees 
have dedicated to these activities is admirable. 
In total, through our employees’ efforts 
we have raised £83,200 for Macmillan and 
will continue the partnership in 2014. 

In a further example of our support for 
Macmillan, a team of 22 people (including 
family and friends) from our IMS division 
based at Rogerstone, UK, set off along the 
challenging Taff Trail, aiming to cycle the 
55 mile journey from Brecon to Cardiff Bay. 
In successfully completing the challenge, 
they raised a total of £8,000.

Approved by the Board on 12 March 2014 and 
signed on its behalf by:

Geraint Anderson  
Group Chief Executive

12 March 2014

Shatish Dasani  
Group Finance Director

12 March 2014

45

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcGovernance

Introduction by the Chairman

“ The focus on simplifying 
structures and common 
business processes has 
had a significant impact 
on effective corporate 
governance throughout 
the Group.”

In this section

46  Introduction by the Chairman

48  Board of Directors and Company Secretary

50  Operating Board

51  Corporate governance

56  Nominations Committee

57  Audit Committee

60  Directors’ remuneration report

62  Directors’ remuneration policy

66  Annual report on remuneration

73  Other statutory disclosures

Sean 
Watson, 
Chairman

46

TT Electronics plc

Annual Report 2013

Although there were no changes to 
the composition of the Board or its 
Committees during 2013, the Board 
continued to pay significant attention 
to succession planning throughout the 
year. In particular, following Geraint 
Anderson’s decision to step down as 
Group Chief Executive, the Nominations 
Committee oversaw the process of 
securing a successor to the role of Group 
CEO, culminating in the announcement 
in January 2014 of the appointment of 
Richard Tyson, who will join the Group 
by the end of June 2014. Similarly, 
the Board has played an active part in 
addressing succession planning issues 
across the wider leadership team, 
particularly in light of the creation of 
the Sensing and Control business during 
2013, which has resulted in several key 
divisional appointments.

The Board continues to take the view 
that it has an effective, well-balanced 
structure, which includes a group of 
non-executives who collectively draw on 
a wealth and variety of experience, thus 
providing for meaningful discussion, 
constructive challenge and effective 
decision making. In particular, the 
Board has continued its policy of early 
engagement in the strategic planning 
cycle during 2013, with two separate 
meetings having been devoted 
exclusively to consideration of the 
strategic direction of the business in the 
coming years. Although not required 
to do so under the UK Corporate 
Governance Code, all Directors will 
submit themselves for re-election at 
the 2014 AGM, thereby continuing the 
process first adopted in 2013.

Diversity is regarded as a key business 
enabler across the Group, and the Board 
seeks to ensure that equal opportunity 
is afforded to all, regardless of gender, 
age, ethnic background or religious 
belief. The Board also believes, however, 
that of equal importance is the need to 
ensure that staff skills and competencies 
are matched to the strategic and 
operational needs of the business in our 
core markets.

The Board (primarily through the 
activities of the Audit Committee) 
has been focused on ensuring that 
the positive steps taken during 
2012 in developing the Group’s 
risk management processes 
(which included clarifying roles 
and responsibilities throughout the 
governance structure, refreshing 
the company-wide risk framework, 
training and communication) were 
consolidated and embedded during 
2013. We have also placed increased 
emphasis on improving understanding 
of risk quantification and appetite, 
and robust project risk management. 
These enhancements to our risk 
management processes, together with 
our continued focus on encouraging the 
correct behaviours, serve to embed our 
core values throughout the Group and 
to strengthen our position as a trusted 
and respected partner to the world 
leading manufacturers with whom we 
do business.

Sean Watson 
Chairman

The Board is committed to maintaining 
the highest standards of corporate 
governance, which we consider to 
be of fundamental importance to 
the future success of TT Electronics. 
This commitment is demonstrated by 
our continued attention to embedding 
our core values, principles, ethics and 
risk management throughout the 
organisation during 2013. In particular, 
our focus on simplifying structures 
and common business processes 
has enhanced the effectiveness of 
corporate governance. 

The regulatory and reporting landscape 
for UK listed companies continued 
to evolve during 2013, with the 
introduction of the new Strategic 
Report, new requirements to report on 
greenhouse gas emissions, and a new 
formal requirement on the Board to 
ensure that the Annual Report presents 
a “fair, balanced and understandable” 
assessment of the Company’s 
financial position and future prospects. 
These new requirements, together with 
the enhanced disclosures required by 
the Audit Committee, have been the 
subject of detailed planning throughout 
the year, and processes have been 
adopted to ensure we are able to meet 
these obligations in a transparent and 
open manner.

On a similar theme, this year’s Annual 
Report represents the first occasion on 
which full implementation of the recent 
reforms on remuneration reporting 
is required. This includes, for the first 
time, a binding shareholder vote on 
remuneration policy, in addition to 
a vote to adopt the Remuneration 
report (as set out on pages 60 to 72 
of this report). We have also taken the 
opportunity to review the long-term 
incentives offered to executives and are 
proposing to replace our existing Long 
Term Incentive Plan with one which 
more closely aligns with current market 
practice. This new incentive plan will be 
put to shareholders at our forthcoming 
Annual General Meeting.

47

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcGovernance

Board of Directors and Company Secretary

Sean Watson (65) 
Chairman

Committees: 
Nominations (Chairman)  
Corporate Governance (Chairman)  
Remuneration

Joined TT: 
2007 as an independent non-executive Director. Chairman 
since May 2010.

Experience:  
A former partner and Head of Corporate Finance with 
CMS Cameron McKenna LLP. Was a non-executive Director 
of Informa plc from 2000 to 2009. A Trustee of Princess 
Alice Hospice.

Geraint Anderson (54)* 
Group Chief Executive

Committees: 
Corporate and Social Responsibility (Chairman)  
Risk (Chairman)

Joined TT: 
2008

Experience:  
Previously Vice President and General Manager of the 
Worldwide Service Provider Organisation for Linksys, a 
division of Cisco Systems, Inc. Appointed a non-executive 
Director and Chair of the Remuneration Committee of 
Volex plc in November 2013.

* On 14 January 2014, it was announced that Geraint Anderson will step 
down from his position as Group Chief Executive. His successor, Richard 
Tyson, will join the Group by the end of June 2014.

Shatish Dasani (52) 
Group Finance Director

Committees: 
Corporate Governance  
Risk

Joined TT: 
2008

Experience:  
A Chartered Accountant, who has held senior finance 
positions with De La Rue plc, Lafarge SA and Blue Circle 
Industries plc. Was also previously a non-executive Director 
of Camelot plc.

Tim Roberts (43) 
Group Business Development Director

Committees: 
Corporate Governance  
Risk

Joined TT:  
2008. Appointed to the Board in January 2010. 
Assumed responsibility for the Group’s Magnetics, 
Connectors and Power & Hybrid businesses during 2013.

Experience:  
Previously Strategy and Business Development Director 
with Spirent Communications plc and formerly a solicitor 
specialising in corporate finance.

48

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcJohn Shakeshaft (59) 
Senior Independent Non-executive Director

Stephen King (53) 
Independent Non-executive Director

Committees: 
Remuneration (Chairman) 
Audit 
Nominations 
Corporate and Social Responsibility

Joined TT:  
2007

Experience:  
Currently Chairman of Ludgate Environmental Fund 
Limited; Deputy Chairman and Chair of the Audit 
Committee of The Economy Bank NV; Chair of the 
Investment Committee of Corestone, AG; director and 
chair of the Audit Committee of Tele2 AB. Director of 
Valiance Investment Funds. External member and Chair 
of the Audit Committee of the Council of Cambridge 
University. Formerly a Managing Director at ABN AMRO 
and Lazard Brothers, having held senior positions within 
Barings, Morgan Stanley and Morgan Grenfell. Joined the 
City in 1986 following a number of overseas postings with 
HM Foreign and Commonwealth Office.

Committees:  
Audit (Chairman)  
Nominations  
Corporate Governance

Joined TT:  
2011

Experience:  
Currently Group Finance Director of Caledonia 
Investments plc and Chairman of the Audit Committee 
of the Board of Bristow Group Inc. Formerly non-executive 
Director and Chairman of the Audit Committee of The 
Weir Group plc. Group finance director of De La Rue plc 
from 2003 to 2009 and, prior to that, finance director of 
Aquila Networks plc (formerly Midlands Electricity plc). 
A Chartered Accountant, Stephen has also held senior 
financial positions in Lucas Industries plc and Seeboard plc 
and was also a non-executive director of Camelot plc from 
2008 to 2009.

Michael Baunton CBE (63) 
Independent Non-executive Director

Lynton Boardman (47) 
Group General Counsel & Company Secretary 

Committees: 
Audit  
Nominations  
Remuneration

Joined TT: 
2010

Experience:  
Currently Chairman of the Board of SMMT Industry Forum 
Limited (the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders’ 
Industry Forum), Non-Executive Chairman of VTL Group 
and a non-executive Director of ACAL Energy Ltd. Awarded 
a CBE in 2004 for services to the automotive and 
engineering industries in the UK. Previously held senior 
executive roles with companies including Caterpillar Inc, 
Perkins Engines Company Limited and Tenneco Inc.

Committees:  
Risk  
Corporate Governance

Joined TT: 
2012 

Experience:  
A qualified solicitor, having practiced with Simmons & 
Simmons, MacFarlanes and Burges Salmon LLP. Formerly 
Head of Legal (Europe, Middle East and Africa) at 
Syngenta Crop Protection and then General Counsel and 
Company Secretary of QinetiQ Group plc from 2002 to 
2011.

49

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcGovernance

Operating Board

The Operating Board comprises the executive Directors, the Group General Counsel & 
Company Secretary and the following executives:

Pat Murray (54)  
Divisional Chief Executive – 
Sensing and Control 

Committees: 
Risk

Joined TT: 2009 

Experience:  
Previously Global Leader of 
Honeywell’s Sensor Division 
and Regional Vice-President 
and General Manager for 
Europe, Middle East and Africa. 
A chartered engineer and Six 
Sigma green belt certified.

Michael Robinson (57)  
Senior Vice President – 
Operations – Sensing 
and Control

Committees: 
Risk

Joined TT: 2014

Experience:  
Previously Senior Vice President, 
Global Operations and Supply Chain 
for TE Connectivity (formerly Tyco 
Electronics) where he specialised 
in Lean implementation and 
manufacturing optimisation. 
A masters degree qualified engineer 
he previously spent 27 years at 
United Technologies Corporation 
where he held a variety of 
manufacturing and engineering 
roles in their aerospace business.

John Molloy (50)  
Divisional Chief Executive – 
IMS 

Gareth Mycock (48)  
Senior Vice President –  
Resistors

Committees:  
Risk

Joined TT: 2005 

Committees: 
Risk 

Joined TT: 2007

Experience:  
Joined the Group when it acquired 
Dage (a business which now forms 
part of the IMS division) where 
he had been working in senior 
management roles for six years, 
primarily in Asia. Previously held 
senior management positions 
with electronics companies and 
EMS providers.

Experience:  
Previously held senior engineering 
and operations roles with The 
Morgan Crucible Company plc, 
working in the fields of electronic 
materials and components. 
A masters degree qualified 
materials scientist, he is fluent 
in German.

John Leighton-Jones (44)  
Group Human 
Resources Director 

Per-Olof Ahlstrom (37)  
Group Head of Risk 
and Assurance 

Committees: 
Corporate and Social 
Responsibility  
Risk

Joined TT: 2010 

Experience:  
Joined from QinetiQ Group plc, 
where he was Human Resources 
Director. Previously worked in a 
variety of senior human resources 
roles. Originally trained as a 
tax accountant.

50

Committees:  
Risk 

Joined TT: 2012 

Experience:  
Joined from Everything Everywhere 
Limited, a joint venture between 
Orange UK and T-Mobile UK, 
where he was Director, Risk 
Assurance and Internal Audit. 
Previously worked with T-Mobile 
and PwC covering programme, 
service integration, risk, audit and 
compliance management. A CISA 
accredited Information System 
Auditor with a BSc and MSc, he is 
fluent in Swedish.

Lee Burtelson (44)  
Group Marketing Director

Committees: 
Risk 

Joined TT: 2011

Experience:  
Previously responsible for 
Honeywell’s pressure and thermal 
sensor portfolios serving global 
medical, industrial and aerospace 
markets. Held a variety of roles at 
Honeywell Sensing and Control 
division over a period of 20 years. 
An engineer who holds an MBA.

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
Governance

Corporate governance

The Company is committed to achieving and maintaining the highest standards of corporate governance. The main and supporting principles of 
good corporate governance set out in the UK Corporate Governance Codes 2010 and 2012 (“Code”) have been complied with throughout the year 
ended 31 December 2013. Details and explanations of the application of the principles of corporate governance are set out below. 

The Board 
Subject to the Company’s Articles of Association, UK legislation and any directions given by special resolution, the business of the Company is 
managed by the Board. The Board’s main roles are to provide leadership to the management of the Group, determine the Group’s strategy 
and ensure that the agreed strategy is implemented. The Board has also reserved certain specific matters to itself for decision. These include 
financial policy and acquisition and disposal policy. The Board appoints its members and those of its principal Committees having received the 
recommendations of the Nominations Committee. It also reviews recommendations of the Board Committees and the financial performance and 
operation of the Group’s businesses. It regularly reviews the identification, evaluation and management of the principal risks faced by the Group and 
the effectiveness of the Group’s system of internal control. 

During 2013, the Board comprised three executive Directors and four non-executive Directors. All of the Directors served throughout the year. 
John Shakeshaft is the senior independent non-executive Director. On 14 January 2014, it was announced that Geraint Anderson will step down 
from his position as Group Chief Executive after six years in the role. His successor, Richard Tyson, will join the Group by the end of June 2014 and  
on the same date, Geraint Anderson will step down as Group Chief Executive and member of the Board.

Board and Committee meetings are scheduled in line with the financial calendar of the Company, thereby ensuring that the latest operating data 
is available for review and sufficient time and focus can be given to matters under consideration. During the year there were seven principal Board 
meetings on scheduled dates for which full notice was given. Of these principal meetings, two were held at different operational locations within the 
Group: in July, the Board meeting was held at TT Electronics Sensing and Control SRL, a manufacturing facility set up in 2011, in Timisoara, Romania; 
whilst the October Board meeting was held at TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services Limited, a subsidiary located in Rogerstone, UK. 
Both visits provided the non-executive Directors with an opportunity to meet employees and gain a better understanding of the companies’ 
operations. 

Beyond these principal meetings, the Board held two strategy meetings during the year, both of which were fully attended. Additional meetings 
are held as and when required and, during 2013, four such meetings took place. The Board has held two principal meetings and one additional 
meeting to date during 2014. Full details of each Director’s Board and Committee meeting attendance are given on page 53 and in the relevant 
Committee report.

Directors 
Directors’ biographies including the Committees on which they serve and chair are shown on pages 48 and 49. 

At the time of his appointment as Chairman, Sean Watson was considered to be independent in accordance with the provisions of the Code. All the 
remaining non-executive Directors are also considered to be independent as defined by the Code.

In accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association each Director will offer himself for re-election at the first Annual General Meeting held 
following his initial appointment and thereafter, every three years. However, continuing the best practice first adopted at the 2013 AGM, all Directors 
will retire and, being eligible, offer themselves for re-election at the forthcoming AGM. Following formal performance evaluation, the performance of 
each Director continues to be effective and to demonstrate commitment to the role.

Directors’ interests 
The Directors of the Company at 31 December 2013 held interests in the following numbers of the Company’s Ordinary shares of 25 pence each on 
1 January 2013, 31 December 2013 and 10 March 2014:

Sean Watson

Geraint Anderson

Shatish Dasani

Tim Roberts

John Shakeshaft

Michael Baunton

Stephen King

10 March 2014 
Ordinary shares

31 December 2013 
Ordinary shares

1 January 2013 
Ordinary shares

190,000

725,156

829,144

174,303

51,206

72,717

100,000

190,000

725,156

829,144

174,303

51,206

72,717

100,000

190,000

560,000

708,000

130,475

51,206

72,717

100,000

The interests of the Directors in the Company’s share options and Long Term Incentive Plan are shown in the Directors’ remuneration report on 
pages 68 to 70. 

51

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcGovernance
Governance

Corporate governance continued
Corporate governance continued

The Chairman and Group Chief Executive 
The division of responsibilities between the Chairman and the Group Chief Executive has been defined, formalised in writing, and approved by 
the Board:

The Chairman maintains responsibility for the leadership and effectiveness of the Board and setting its agenda; ensuring that all Directors receive 
accurate, timely and clear information on financial, business and corporate matters to enable them to participate effectively in Board decisions; 
facilitating the effective contribution of non-executive Directors in particular; ensuring constructive relations between executive and non-executive 
Directors; and ensuring effective communication with shareholders. He is also responsible for ensuring that the performance of individual Directors, 
the Board as a whole and its Committees is evaluated at least once a year.

The Group Chief Executive is responsible for the operations of the Group. In particular, he is responsible for developing Group objectives and strategy, 
having regard to the Group’s responsibilities to its shareholders, customers, employees and other stakeholders and, following presentation to, and 
approval by, the Board, for the successful implementation and achievement of those strategies and objectives. His other areas of responsibility 
include managing the Group’s risk profile, including its health and safety performance; ensuring that the Group’s businesses are managed in line with 
strategy and approved business plans, and comply with applicable legislation and Group policy; ensuring effective communication with shareholders; 
and setting Group human resource policies, including management development and succession planning for the senior executive team. 

Board procedures 
All Directors have access to the advice and services of the Group General Counsel & Company Secretary and are offered training to fulfil their role 
as Directors, both on appointment and at any subsequent time. There is an agreed procedure for any individual Director to take independent 
professional advice at the Company’s expense if he considers it necessary. 

In accordance with the provisions on conflicts of interest in the Companies Act 2006, the Company has put in place procedures for the disclosure 
and review of any conflicts, or potential conflicts, of interest which the Directors may have and for the authorisation of such conflicts by the Board. 
In deciding whether to authorise a conflict or potential conflict, the Directors must have regard to their general duties under the Companies Act 
2006. The authorisation of any conflict, and the terms of authorisation, may be reviewed at any time and, in accordance with best practice, a review 
of Directors’ conflicts of interests is conducted annually. 

Board and Committee performance evaluation 
In accordance with the Code, the Board conducted an evaluation of its performance and that of its principal Committees during 2013. The potential 
use of external facilitation of the Board performance evaluation process was considered during the year, but was not felt to be appropriate in light 
of the forthcoming changes to the Group Chief Executive position. External evaluation will remain on the agenda for consideration by the Board 
during 2014.

The Board performance evaluation programme was led by the Chairman. Each Director completed a questionnaire which was used to score and 
comment on a number of performance criteria. These individual responses were then compiled into a single report by the Group General Counsel 
& Company Secretary and this was circulated to the Board for discussion and detailed review. It was concluded that the Board was performing 
satisfactorily, noting in particular that:

•	

•	

•	

•	

	Early	participation	in	the	2013	strategy	process,	with	open	discussion	of	strategic	options,	had	been	of	great	benefit;

	Risk	management	continued	to	improve,	with	changes	to	the	composition	of	the	Risk	Committee	and	the	format	of	its	meetings,	together	with	a	
more proactive approach and increased focus on key areas by the Audit Committee, having contributed to the progress made in this area;

	Increasing	the	Board’s	engagement	on	matters	of	Corporate	and	Social	Responsibility	should	continue	to	be	given	greater	focus;	and

	The	Board	had	performed	well	in	addressing	a	number	of	significant	transformational	matters	over	the	year,	but	would	need	to	remain	vigilant	in	
monitoring successful implementation of these programmes and the associated risks. 

Directors’ performance evaluation 
In accordance with the Code, the performance of individual Directors was also evaluated.

Each of the non-executive Directors completed a self-assessment questionnaire which required them to score their own performance against 
a number of criteria. The Chairman then held private discussions with each non-executive Director and this provided an opportunity to discuss 
any issues which had arisen in respect of either their individual assessments or those of the Board and its principal Committees. In respect of the 
Chairman’s performance, the other non-executive Directors, led by the senior independent non-executive Director, and with input from the Group 
Chief Executive, met privately to discuss this, with the outcomes being fed back to the Chairman by the senior independent non-executive Director for 
discussion and action as appropriate.

At the beginning of the year, each executive Director was set challenging performance objectives, progress against which was then reviewed as the 
year progressed. All the executive Directors take part in the Group’s performance management programme under which they each receive detailed 
feedback from their colleagues. This, together with a review of progress against agreed goals and objectives, is used to assess performance and to set 
clear objectives and developmental plans for the following year which are closely aligned with the Group’s strategic priorities and values. The Group 
Chief Executive met with each of the other two executive Directors to discuss and review their performance against objectives. The performance 
evaluation of the Group Chief Executive was conducted by the Chairman, taking account of the output from the Group’s performance management 
programme together with feedback provided by the other non-executive Directors at a private meeting held to discuss this and any other matters 
which the non-executive Directors wished to raise.

52

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcBoard Committees 
The Board has established a number of Committees, each with its own delegated authority defined in terms of reference. These terms are reviewed 
periodically and the Board receives reports and copies of minutes of Committee meetings. The Board appoints the members of all principal Board 
Committees, having received the recommendations of the Nominations Committee. 

Principal committees 
The principal committees are the Nominations, Audit and Remuneration Committees. Details of the Nominations and Audit Committees, including 
brief descriptions of their terms of reference (full details of which are available for inspection by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting and 
on the Group’s website) and duties, together with a summary of significant events which have taken place during the year, can be found on pages 
56 to 59 and should be read as part of the Directors’ report. Details of the Remuneration Committee and its activities are contained within the 
Remuneration report on pages 60 to 72.

Board meeting attendance 2013 
Seven principal Board meetings were held during 2013. Details of attendance are set out below:

Sean Watson

Geraint Anderson

Shatish Dasani

Tim Roberts

Michael Baunton

Stephen King

John Shakeshaft

7 of 7

7 of 7

7 of 7

7 of 7

7 of 7

7 of 7

7 of 7

Additional meetings of the Board and its principal Committees take place as and when required throughout the year. During 2013 there were four 
such meetings. By necessity, these meetings are often convened at shorter notice than would be the case for principal meetings, however all these 
meetings were fully attended. 

Beyond the principal Board meetings, the Board held two strategy meetings during the year, both of which were fully attended.

Directors’ attendance at meetings of the principal Committees on which they serve are detailed in the Nominations, Audit and Remuneration 
Committee reports on pages 56, 57 and 60.

Other Committees
Corporate Governance Committee 
The Corporate Governance Committee is responsible for monitoring the Group’s compliance with good corporate governance. During the year it 
was chaired by the Chairman and included an independent non-executive Director, the Group Finance Director, the Group Business Development 
Director and the Group General Counsel & Company Secretary. The Committee’s duties are as follows: to review regularly the corporate governance 
procedures of the Company to ensure that they are up-to-date and effective, and are communicated to those employees, officers and/or Directors 
of the Company or its subsidiaries to whom they are relevant; to make recommendations to the Board from time to time on any procedures, or 
processes, that may need changing, in order to ensure that the Company is compliant with relevant legislation, including but not limited to, the 
Companies Act 2006; to ensure that the Company is compliant with the standards and disclosures required by the Code and the Listing, Prospectus 
and Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the UK Listing Authority; and to receive reports, or any views expressed by shareholders, stakeholders, 
government or other regulatory bodies and any other interested parties in relation to corporate governance.

The Committee met twice during 2013, during which time it agreed to continue with the annual re-election for all Directors implemented with 
effect from the Annual General Meeting held in 2013, notwithstanding the fact that this provision only applies to companies within the FTSE 350. 
The reports and AGM voting recommendations from various investor bodies were also reviewed and suggested areas for improvement noted in 
relation to audit policy, remuneration policy, diversity and environmental, social and governance matters. 

The Committee also considered how recent statutory and regulatory changes would affect the disclosures required in the Annual Report and 
Accounts and the management measures needed in order to achieve compliance with the new requirements.
Corporate and Social Responsibility Committee
The Corporate and Social Responsibility Committee is chaired by the Group Chief Executive and also comprises one independent non-executive 
Director and up to three senior executives from within the Group. The Committee met four times during 2013 and has held one meeting to date 
during 2014. The Board regularly receives reports on its activities.

Further information on the activities of the Corporate and Social Responsibility Committee is given in the Corporate responsibility section on pages 
42 to 45.

53

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcGovernance

Corporate governance continued

Risk Committee 
The Risk Committee assists the Board and the Audit Committee in fulfilling their responsibilities by: providing a framework for managing risks 
throughout the Group; monitoring risk appetite and exposure through regular reviews of principal risks; reviewing the effectiveness of risk 
management processes and controls; and providing an appropriate level of reporting on the status of risk management within the Group.

This is achieved by promoting awareness of risk management and ensuring that a robust risk management framework is in place to enable risks to 
be identified, quantified, managed, monitored and reported. 

During the year the Committee was chaired by the Group Chief Executive and included the Group Finance Director, Group Business Development 
Director, Group General Counsel & Company Secretary, Group Head of Risk and Assurance, Group Human Resources Director, Group IT Director, 
Group Marketing Director, Group Purchasing Director and Divisional Chief Executives. The Committee met ten times during 2013 and has held two 
meetings to date in 2014. 

Further information on the Group’s risk management activities and framework is given in the Risk management framework and Risk profile section 
on pages 24 to 27 and in the Review of internal controls below.
Review of internal controls 
The Directors have overall responsibility for the Group’s systems of internal control and for reviewing their effectiveness. These systems have been in 
place for the full financial year. The Group is committed to a policy of maintaining appropriate internal control over all of its activities. Controls are 
designed to provide the Directors with reasonable assurance that assets are safeguarded, transactions are properly authorised, and that material 
errors and irregularities are prevented or, if controls are failing, are discovered and mitigated on a timely basis. The systems of control are reviewed 
regularly and improved where necessary to meet the Group’s requirements. Business risk evaluation takes place at operating company, divisional and 
Group levels through regular performance reviews and as part of the annual budget preparation process. Having identified risks, operating companies 
and divisions then monitor, review and update the associated controls to mitigate the risks appropriately. 

Further details of the Group’s exposure to risk and processes in place to manage the same are set out on pages 24 to 27. 

The risk management procedures and systems of internal control are designed to identify and assess principal risks which the Group faces and to 
manage them appropriately. However, such systems can only provide reasonable and not absolute protection against material mis-statement or loss. 
Principal features of the system of internal control 
The Directors meet as a Board at least every other month to monitor financial performance, give direction on significant strategic and financial issues 
and review the principal risks of the Group. 

The Group Chief Executive chairs a Committee (“Operating Board”) consisting of the executive Directors, Divisional Chief Executives and other senior 
management. The Operating Board meets on a monthly basis and reviews the historical performance and the outlook for the Group as a whole and 
agrees and implements any actions as necessary. In addition, it is responsible for monitoring and driving delivery of the Group’s key priorities and 
acts as a forum to raise and debate significant operational issues. Biographies of Operating Board members are given on page 50.

Each operating company within the Group operates within the policies, rules and procedures determined by the Directors and communicated 
through an internet based Group Policies hub. The Directors exercise control over operating companies through divisional senior executives who 
monitor and oversee the activities, financial performance and controls of each operating company and seek to ensure that these companies 
comply with Group accounting policies in the process for preparation of consolidated financial statements. The directors of operating companies 
and heads of business units are held accountable for the effectiveness of the implementation and maintenance of controls within their companies. 
This provides constant and consistent management.

During the year, a comprehensive control framework for key business processes was drawn up by Group-wide project teams and this is currently 
being implemented. Each business unit will be required to carry out a self-assessment against the control framework and draw up action plans for 
management. This will form the basis for internal review and audit.

The Group has detailed financial planning and reporting systems. Management accounts are prepared monthly by each operating company 
comparing actual performance with budget. The financial performance of each operating company is subjected to in-depth formal review at 
monthly meetings. A key purpose of these reviews is the early identification of potential business risks and agreement on suitable and prompt 
courses of action. Operating companies prepare strategic plans and annual budgets which are consolidated up to a divisional and Group level and 
are reviewed and approved by the divisional senior executives, Group management and the Board. 

54

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcThe Group rigorously enforces its comprehensive control and approval procedures which incorporate clear definitions of appropriate authorisation 
levels. Capital investment and other major items of expenditure are made only after compliance with detailed appraisal procedures and, if above set 
levels, only with the approval of the executive Directors and the Board. 

Accounting and reporting policies and practices require that the Group’s accounting records are prepared consistently, accurately and in compliance 
with Group policy and relevant accounting standards.

The Risk and Assurance department reviews the internal control environment according to the annual internal audit plan agreed with the 
Audit Committee. 

Certain key functions, including treasury, taxation, pensions, provision of legal advice, risk and insurance are controlled at the Group’s head office and 
are monitored by the executive Directors. 

The Directors have reviewed the effectiveness of the systems of risk management and internal control during the year to 31 December 2013 and 
during the period since then to the date of this report. They have made, and will continue to make, improvements where necessary.

Financial risk management objectives and policies are set out under Financial risks on page 27. 
Investor relations
The Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director meet institutional investors immediately after publication of the annual and interim results 
and on an ongoing basis as required. In 2013, this included investor roadshows held over a total of 13 days in London and Scotland in respect of the 
annual and interim results, plus a further five days meeting investors and private client fund managers in London, Leeds, Manchester, New York and 
Boston spread throughout the year. Sean Watson, as Chairman, and John Shakeshaft, as senior independent non-executive Director and Chairman 
of the Remuneration Committee, also undertake consultation on certain matters with major shareholders from time to time. Through these Directors, 
the Company maintains a regular dialogue with institutional shareholders and analysts. Feedback is reported to the Board so that all Directors 
develop an understanding of the views of major shareholders about the Company. Trading updates and press releases are issued as appropriate and 
the Company’s brokers provide briefings on shareholder opinion and compile independent feedback from investor meetings. Information offered 
at the analysts’ meetings together with our financial press releases are available on the Group’s website. The Annual General Meeting is used by the 
Directors to communicate with both institutional and private investors. 
Going concern 
The Directors have reviewed the budgets for 2014 and the projections for 2015 developed during the 2013 annual strategic planning cycle. 
The Directors have assessed the future funding requirements of the Group and compared them with the level of available borrowing facilities, 
recognising that the main committed facility was re-negotiated during 2012 for a period of five years to August 2017. Based on this, the Directors 
are satisfied that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future. For this reason they continue to 
adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements. 

Approved by the Board on 12 March 2014 and signed on its behalf by: 

Lynton Boardman 
Group General Counsel & Company Secretary 

55

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
Governance

Nominations Committee

Membership: 
Sean Watson (Chairman)

Michael Baunton

Stephen King

John Shakeshaft

Committee meeting attendance 2013

Sean Watson

Michael Baunton

Stephen King

John Shakeshaft

2 of 2

2 of 2

2 of 2

2 of 2

Remit
The Nominations Committee’s remit includes: the structure, size and composition of the Board as a whole; the overall leadership needs of the 
organisation; consideration of succession planning for Directors and Divisional Chief Executives (having due regard to the length of service of non-
executive Directors) and the search for and selection of suitable candidates for the appointment of replacement or additional Directors. 

Committee meetings in 2013
During 2013 the Committee held two formal meetings.

The Committee also held a number of meetings during the year to discuss succession planning in respect of a new Group Chief Executive. 
External consultants conducted a comprehensive search and the Committee scrutinised the shortlist to identify those candidates with the most 
relevant experience. This resulted in the appointment of Richard Tyson who met with each member of the Committee as part of the selection 
process. Richard, who has over 20 years’ experience in the communications, aerospace and defence industries, together with a successful track record 
of growing businesses both organically and by acquisition, will join TT Electronics before the end of June 2014. He joins from Cobham plc where he is 
a member of the Cobham Executive Committee and President of the Aerospace & Security Division (Cobham’s largest) which has annual revenues 
in excess of £700 million and doubled in size between 2008 and 2013 under his leadership. 

The Committee has held no formal meetings to date during 2014.

2013 review
The Committee seeks to ensure that the Board of TT Electronics is balanced and effective with diverse skills, knowledge and experience. Diversity and 
gender inclusiveness span the whole Group and are important and enduring considerations in the search for and selection of Board members.

During 2013 the Committee re-considered whether the introduction of diversity quotas or targets was appropriate and reviewed the changes to 
reporting requirements insofar as they related to diversity. The Committee is rigorous in seeking talent and is focused on ensuring that the Group has 
the best possible Board available to promote its interests. The Committee engages external search consultants to assist in the specification of Board 
positions and the selection of prospective candidates to ensure a robust, measurable and orderly process. The Committee believes that this rigorous 
process has led to the recruitment of talented individuals, significantly enhancing the composition of the Board. 

The Committee continues to consider that diversity quotas at Board level are inappropriate and is committed to recruiting the best talent available, 
based on merit and assessed against objective criteria of skills, knowledge, independence and experience. Its primary objective is to ensure that TT 
Electronics maintains the strongest possible leadership. 

The Board attaches a high degree of importance to diversity at all levels across the Group, although of equal importance is the need to ensure 
that staff skills and competencies are matched to the strategic and operational needs of the business in its core markets. Details of the number of 
employees, senior managers and Directors of each gender are given in the Corporate responsibility section on page 43. 

During 2013 the Committee considered executive succession planning in light of the significant changes to the composition of the CEO’s direct 
reports (together with those members of management immediately below) which had primarily resulted from the creation of the new Sensing and 
Control division. This remains an area of focus for the Committee. 

Non-executive Directors’ lengths of service

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

John Shakeshaft
Michael Baunton
Stephen King

First three year term

First additional three year term

Second additional three year term

Performance evaluation
The Committee carried out an assessment of its performance in 2013 based on a review of its activities during the year against its terms of reference. 
It was concluded that the Committee had performed satisfactorily and is structured appropriately to provide effective support to the Board. 
The Committee had continued to be closely involved in the recruitment process for senior positions below Board level, which in turn had enabled 
greater visibility of potential successors to executive Board positions. The Committee also continued to have improved visibility on the business and 
the performance of senior management team members as a result of Divisional Chief Executives presenting at Board meetings, site visits undertaken 
by the Board during the year and non-executive Directors participating in Group events. 

56

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcGovernance

Audit Committee

Membership: 
Stephen King (Chairman)

Michael Baunton

John Shakeshaft

Committee meeting attendance 2013

Stephen King

Michael Baunton

John Shakeshaft

4 of 4

4 of 4

4 of 4

Remit
The Committee’s duties include reviewing and advising the Board on: 

	the	integrity	of	the	financial	statements;	
	the	appointment	and	remuneration	of	external	auditors	and	their	effectiveness	in	line	with	the	requirements	of	the	Code;

•	
•	
•	 the	nature	and	extent	of	non-audit	services	provided	by	the	Auditors	to	ensure	that	their	independence	and	objectivity	are	maintained;
•	

	changes	to	accounting	policies	and	procedures,	decisions	of	judgement	affecting	financial	reporting,	compliance	with	accounting	standards	and	
with the Companies Act 2006; 
	internal	control	and	risk	management	processes,	including	principal	risks	and	internal	control	findings	highlighted	by	management	or	internal	and	
external audit;
	the	content	of	the	Auditors’	transparency	report,	concerning	Auditor	independence	in	providing	both	audit	and	non-audit	services;
	the	scope,	performance	and	effectiveness	of	the	internal	audit	and	other	internal	control	functions	and	the	Auditors’	assessment	thereon;	and	
	the	Company’s	procedures	for	responding	to	any	allegations	made	by	whistleblowers.	

•	

•	
•	
•	

The Code requires that at least one member of the Audit Committee has recent and relevant financial experience. Stephen King fulfils 
this requirement. 

Committee meetings in 2013
During 2013 the Committee held four scheduled meetings.

The Committee met twice with the Group’s Auditors, KPMG Audit Plc, without executives of the Company being present. During the year, the 
Committee also met once with the Group Head of Risk and Assurance (the head of the internal control function) without other executives of the 
Company being present.

The Committee has held one meeting to date during 2014.

2013 review
In order that the Audit Committee fulfils its duties regarding the integrity of the financial statements and other financial data, the Group Finance 
Director and the Director of Group Financial Control attend Committee meetings, presenting reports and providing analysis and explanations for 
queries raised. The external Auditors are also attendees and present reports on their audits. They address such matters as an overview of the financial 
statements, key accounting judgements, accounting policies, audit differences and internal control matters.

The Group Head of Risk and Assurance also attends meetings to update the Audit Committee on: progress on the internal audit plan; findings and 
recommendations; and team and methodology improvements. A formal review of the effectiveness of the internal control function is undertaken as 
part of the year end process. The Committee also regularly receives reports from the Risk Committee to allow members to review principal risks and 
the effectiveness of risk management processes. 

In addition to standing agenda items, during 2013 the Committee also reviewed and considered matters including:

– Inventory costing;

– IT risks, cyber security and IT governance;

– Group anti-bribery training and compliance;

– progress on internal control improvements;

– changes to the finance organisation resulting from the new Sensing and Control operating structure; and

– changes to reporting requirements, including the impact of the new ‘Fair, balanced and understandable’ reporting requirements on the Company.

Whistleblowing matters reported through the Group’s multi-lingual, anonymous Ethics and Integrity portal are reported to, and considered by, the 
Committee. During the year the Committee received details of three cases, each of which was investigated with appropriate action taken.

57

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plc	
	
Governance

Audit Committee continued

The Committee has reviewed and challenged the form and content of the Group’s Annual Report and accounts and financial statements for 2013. 
In conducting its review, the Committee considered reports prepared by management and the external Auditors. These reports covered analyses 
of the judgements and sources of estimation uncertainty involved in applying the accounting policies as described in note 1(f) to the financial 
statements. The Committee also considered and challenged the goodwill assumptions and level of provisions held on the balance sheet (as detailed 
below), as well as the going concern statement on page 85. 

Significant issues considered in relation to the financial statements
The main areas of judgement and estimation are set out in the accounting policies on page 85. 

The Committee received and reviewed reports from management and the external Auditors setting out the significant issues in relation to the 2013 
financial statements which related to:
– provisions; 
– tax 
– product warranty, legal and restructuring

– carrying value of goodwill. 

These issues (which are considered in more detail below) were discussed with management during the year and with the external Auditors at the 
time the Committee reviewed and agreed the external Auditors’ Group audit plan; when the external Auditors reviewed the half year results in 
August 2013; and also at the conclusion of the audit of the financial statements.

Provisions
(i)  Tax
Provisions held in respect of tax risks are included within current and deferred tax liabilities depending on the underlying circumstances of the 
provision. Management confirmed to the Committee that the provisions recorded at 31 December 2013 represent their best estimate of the 
potential financial exposure faced by the Group.

The Auditor explained to the Committee the work they had conducted during the year, including how their audit procedures were focused on those 
provisions with the highest level of judgement on recognition criteria and/ or measurement. On the basis of their audit work, the auditor reported 
no inconsistencies or misstatements that were material in the context of the financial statements as a whole; and in our view this supports the 
appropriateness of our methodology.

(ii)  Product warranty, legal and restructuring
As further explained in note 2(p) to the financial statements, a provision is recognised in the financial statements when the Group has a present legal 
or constructive obligation as a result of a past event and it is probable that an outflow of resources, that can be reliably measured, will be required to 
meet the obligation. Provisions are recognised at an amount equal to management’s best estimate of the expenditure required to meet the Group’s 
liability taking into account the time value of money, where this is considered material. On legal and contractual exposures, the Committee received 
periodic reports from the Group General Counsel & Company Secretary outlining the open legal and contractual disputes and best estimate of the 
expected costs associated with such matters. 

Management has confirmed to the Committee that the provisions recorded at 31 December 2013 represent their best estimate of the potential 
financial exposure faced by the Group. The external Auditors explained to the Committee the work they had conducted during the year, including 
how their audit procedures were focused on those provisions with the highest level of judgement on recognition criteria and/or measurement. On the 
basis of their audit work, the Auditors reported no inconsistencies or misstatements that were material in the context of the financial statements as a 
whole; and in the Committee’s view this supports the appropriateness of the Company’s methodology. 

Further information about the specific categories of provisions held by the Group is set out in note 19. 

Carrying value of goodwill 
As more fully explained in note 14, the total carrying amount of goodwill at 31 December 2013 is £63.9 million. During the year, management 
assessed the carrying value of goodwill (including detailed calculations of value in use for those cash generating units whose recoverable amount 
is not significantly greater than its carrying amount) to ensure the carrying values are supported by forecast future discounted cash flows. 
No impairment charges were required as a result of the impairment assessment. 

The external Auditors explained the results of their review of the estimate of value in use, including their challenge of management’s underlying cash 
flow projections, the key growth assumptions and discount rates. On the basis of their audit work, no impairments that were material in the context 
of the financial statements as a whole were identified by the Auditors. 

Misstatements 
Management has confirmed to the Committee that they were not aware of any material misstatements or immaterial misstatements made 
intentionally to achieve a particular presentation. The external Auditors reported to the Committee the misstatements that they had found in the 
course of their work and that no material amounts remain unadjusted. The Committee confirms that it is satisfied that the external Auditors have 
fulfilled their responsibilities with diligence and professional scepticism. 

After reviewing the presentations and reports from management and consulting where necessary with the Auditors, the Audit Committee is satisfied 
that the financial statements appropriately address the critical judgements and key estimates (both in respect of the amounts reported and the 
disclosures). The Committee is also satisfied that the significant assumptions used for determining the value of assets and liabilities have been 
appropriately scrutinised, challenged and are sufficiently robust.

58

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
Future IFRS and UK GAAP developments
The Committee has received a report from management and discussed future accounting developments likely to affect the presentation of the 
Group’s financial statements.

Fair, balanced and understandable
Following implementation of the 2012 UK Corporate Governance Code, the Board requested that the Committee advise them on whether it believed 
that the Group’s Annual Report, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to 
assess the Company’s performance, business model and strategic plan. On careful review of the Annual Report for the year ended 31 December 
2013 and the basis for the statement made by the Board on “Fair, balanced and understandable” on page 76, the Audit Committee recommended 
to the Board that, taken as a whole, the Annual Report is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders 
to assess the Company’s performance, business model and strategic plan.

Auditors’ independence, objectivity and effectiveness
The independence of the Auditors is assessed annually by the Audit Committee in order to ensure that suitable policies and procedures are in place 
to safeguard the Auditors’ independence and objectivity, having regard to length of tenure, provision of non-audit services and the existence of any 
conflicts of interest. KPMG Audit Plc were appointed in July 2010, at which time their independence had been considered. At the time of the latest 
annual assessment, the provision of non-audit services was reviewed, together with KPMG Audit Plc’s Transparency Report, and KPMG Audit Plc 
confirmed that no conflicts of interest existed of which the Audit Committee should be aware.

The Committee has formally reviewed the independence of the Auditors as part of the 2013 review. KPMG Audit Plc have provided a letter to 
the Committee confirming that they remain independent within the meaning of the regulations on this matter and in accordance with their 
professional standards.

The Committee also reviewed the effectiveness of the Auditors during the year. The use of an evaluation questionnaire, an auditor assessment 
survey (completed by heads of finance across the Group’s operations), together with information provided by the Auditors, assisted in ensuring that a 
comprehensive assessment was undertaken. Areas for improvement were identified and communicated to the Auditors for action.

The Audit Committee has recommended to the Board that KPMG Audit Plc continue in office as Auditors.

Policy on non-audit services
The Company has an established policy regarding the provision of non-audit services by external auditors. This states that non-audit services may be 
obtained from the most appropriate source having regard to expertise, availability, knowledge and cost. Non-audit services where fees are expected 
to exceed £25,000 should be approved, in advance, by the Chairman of the Audit Committee or in his absence by another member of the Audit 
Committee. There is also a restriction such that fees for non-audit services will not exceed those for audit services, paid to the same service provider 
for more than two consecutive years, unless specifically recommended by the Audit Committee and agreed by the Board. The overriding preference 
of the Committee is not to engage the Auditors for additional non-assurance services, unless there are compelling reasons to the contrary, such as 
capability, time or cost.

In 2013, audit service fees paid to KPMG Audit Plc were £0.8 million, whilst non-audit service fees paid to KPMG totalled £0.3 million. Of this 
£0.3 million: £0.1 million related to minor projects which were beneath the £25,000 approval threshold detailed above. The remaining £0.2 million 
of non-audit service fees paid to KPMG during the year comprised fees principally relating to the provision of taxation services, including taxation 
compliance advice.

During 2013, the Committee reviewed the Company’s proportionate spend on audit services, relative to non-audit services, against that of peer 
group companies. Having reviewed the outcome of this exercise, the Committee is comfortable that the level of spend on non-audit services is 
reasonable, with non-audit fees paid by the Company in 2013 representing 38 per cent of audit fees, compared to the benchmarked average of 
56 per cent.

Performance evaluation
The Committee carried out an assessment of its performance in 2013 based on a review of its activities during the year against its terms of 
reference. It was concluded that the Committee had performed effectively and is structured appropriately to provide effective support to the Board. 
Areas for development which emerged from the performance assessment were identified and appropriate focus will be given to these during the 
forthcoming year. 

59

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcGovernance

Directors’ remuneration report

Membership: 
John Shakeshaft (Chairman)

Michael Baunton

Sean Watson

Committee meeting attendance 2013

John Shakeshaft

Michael Baunton

Sean Watson

4 of 5

5 of 5

5 of 5

Remuneration Committee Report
Committee meeting attendance 2013
During 2013 the Committee held five scheduled meetings.

One additional meeting of the Committee took place during the year and this was fully attended. The Committee has held two meetings to date 
during 2014.

The Group Chief Executive and the Group Human Resources Director also attend Committee meetings and provide internal support and advice on 
market and regulatory developments in remuneration practice and employee share plans. Their attendance ensures that the Committee is kept fully 
abreast of general pay policies throughout the Group which it then takes into account when determining the remuneration of executive Directors 
and our most senior executives. No individual is allowed to participate in any matter concerning the details of their own remuneration.

Annual statement
Dear Shareholder

As Chairman of the Remuneration Committee, I am pleased to introduce our Directors’ remuneration report for the year ended 31 December 2013. 

The Committee strives to demonstrate and operate best practice with regard to both disclosure and executive remuneration strategy. Consistent with 
the UK Government’s reforms on Directors’ pay published during 2013 by the Department for Business, Innovation and Skills, we trust that this 
report demonstrates our commitment to transparency and clarity in disclosure. This report has been divided into three sections:
•	
•	

	This	Annual	statement	which	summarises	and	explains	the	major	decisions	and	changes	in	respect	of	Directors’	remuneration;
	A	Directors’	remuneration	policy	which	sets	out	the	remuneration	policy	for	the	Company’s	Directors	which	will	take	effect	upon	approval	by	
shareholders from the 2014 AGM; and
	An	Annual	report	on	remuneration	which	provides	details	of	the	remuneration	earned	by	the	Company’s	Directors	in	relation	to	the	year	ended	
31 December 2013.

•	

The Directors’ remuneration policy will be subject to a binding shareholder vote and the Annual report on remuneration will be subject to an advisory 
shareholder vote at the Annual General Meeting on 9 May 2014. The Directors’ remuneration policy will be subject to a binding vote every three 
years (sooner if changes are made to the policy) and the Annual report on remuneration to an annual advisory vote.

Performance evaluation
The Committee assessed its performance, constitution and terms of reference during 2013 based on a questionnaire completed by members. 
The Committee was deemed to have performed satisfactorily.

60

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcEmphasis in 2013
The Committee’s main activities during 2013 included the:
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	

	annual	review	of	base	salary	levels	for	executive	Directors;	
	assessment	of	annual	bonus	levels	for	executive	Directors	for	2012,	payable	in	2013;
	review	of	the	cash	targets	for	bonus	arrangements	for	2013;
	evaluation	of	targets	for	the	2014	executive	Directors’	annual	bonus	plan;
	review	of	total	remuneration	levels	for	executive	Directors	and	the	next	level	of	senior	executives;
	review	of	the	linkage	between	risk	and	reward	in	relation	to	remuneration	structure;
	review	of	non-executive	Chairman’s	fees;
	vesting	of	2010	grant	under	the	LTIP;
	2013	grant	under	the	LTIP	(including	a	review	of	performance	targets);
	review	of	the	LTIP	structure	and	the	current	dilution	position;	
	review	of	the	Committee’s	external	advisers;
	issuance	of	performance	based	awards	under	our	Restricted	Share	Plan	(RSP)	to	key	individuals	below	executive	Directors.	Awards	were	based	on	
profit, revenue and ROCE measures;
	consideration	of	Economic	Value	Added	proposals;
	evaluation	of	proposed	BIS	reporting	regulations	on	Directors’	pay;	and
	review	of	replacement	LTIP.

•	
•	
•	

The year ended 31 December 2013 has been a challenging year in a number of our markets. Despite the challenges, we have managed to increase 
revenue, profit and earnings per share during the period. Reflecting this, the 2013 annual bonus paid out at 53.4 per cent of maximum and the 2011 
LTIP is expected to vest in 2014 at 39.6 per cent of the maximum.

Remuneration policy for 2014
The Remuneration Committee continually reviews the senior executive remuneration policy to ensure it promotes the attraction, motivation and 
retention of high quality executives who are key to delivering the Company’s strategy and who will be key to delivering sustainable earnings growth 
and shareholder return. 

The Committee’s most recent conclusions are that the existing senior executive remuneration policy is appropriate and should continue to operate 
for 2014 without major changes. The Committee concluded that:

•	 basic	salary	levels	remain	appropriately	positioned	in	the	market.	Increases	for	executive	Directors	for	2014	were	therefore	limited	to	2.8	per	cent;

•	 the	structure	and	quantum	of	the	annual	bonus	continues	to	be	appropriate;	and

•	

	the	long-term	incentive	grant	policy,	where	awards	are	granted	annually	based	on	earnings	per	share,	relative	total	shareholder	return	
performance conditions and continued service, aligns the senior executive team with shareholders. This alignment is strengthened by the 
operation of share ownership guidelines.

•	

	while	the	long-term	incentive	policy	remains	unchanged,	as	a	result	of	the	current	LTIP	reaching	the	end	of	its	ten	year	life,	a	replacement	plan,
based on similar terms, will be taken to the 2014 AGM for shareholder approval.

In conclusion, the Committee believes that the remuneration policy continues to incentivise the delivery of strong and sustainable financial results 
and the creation of shareholder value.

John Shakeshaft 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

12 March 2014 

61

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plc	
Governance

Directors’ remuneration policy

In formulating the remuneration policy, full consideration has been given to the principles set out in the UK Corporate Governance Code. 
The Committee regularly reviews the policy to ensure it takes account of best practice and the particular circumstances of the Company. 
Consistent with the new legislation, the Directors’ remuneration policy will be put to a binding shareholder vote at the forthcoming Annual 
General Meeting.

Policy overview
The Group is committed to the objective of maximising shareholder return in the longer term and ensuring that a strong link is maintained between 
performance and reward. The remuneration policy aims to be competitive, performance based, aligned with shareholder interests and relatively 
simple and transparent. 

The Committee aims to approve base salaries, commensurate with experience, around market levels coupled with highly competitive total rewards, 
linked to performance and aligned with shareholder interests. Remuneration packages must meet the objectives of attracting, retaining and 
motivating executives of the highest quality in a challenging business environment. In recommending a mix of fixed and variable remuneration, the 
Committee is mindful of avoiding excessive risks in the pursuit of performance metrics. 

Following a review of the current total remuneration policy for executive Directors and senior managers, the Committee concluded that the following 
principles remain appropriate for 2014. 

Competitive: Through a combination of base salaries and competitive performance-related incentive mechanisms, the Group aims to provide 
individuals with competitive total remuneration in return for superior performance. Base salaries are designed to reflect the requirements of the role 
and responsibility, together with the overall level of individual performance. In ascertaining appropriate salary adjustments, account is also taken of 
prevailing market and economic conditions together with salary levels across the Group. 

Performance related: The majority of the executive Directors’ and senior business unit leaders’ remuneration packages are determined based 
on the performance of the Group. A significant proportion of this is aligned with shareholder interests, based on earnings growth “EPS” and total 
shareholder return “TSR”. Failure to reach set performance thresholds leads to no payout under the Group’s annual bonus or long-term incentive 
arrangements. In order to provide further alignment with the achievement of strategic objectives and delivery of value to shareholders, executive 
Directors have agreed to maintain a minimum holding of the Group’s shares equal to 100 per cent of their base salary. 

Transparency: In order to engender a fair and collaborative culture, total remuneration frameworks are clear and openly communicated. 

Components of total remuneration 
Executive Directors’ total remuneration packages comprised: 

•	 Fixed	pay,	including	base	salary,	pension	contribution,	car	or	car	allowance,	private	medical	insurance,	life	assurance;	and	

•	

	Variable	pay,	comprising	annual	bonus	opportunity,	participation	in	a	share	based	Long	Term	Incentive	Plan	and	participation	in	an	all	employee	
share scheme. 

Consideration of shareholder views
The Remuneration Committee considers shareholder feedback received in connection with the Annual General Meeting each year at a meeting 
immediately following the AGM and at other times during the year. This feedback is considered as part of the Company’s annual review of 
remuneration policy. In addition, the Remuneration Committee engages directly with major shareholders and their representative bodies should any 
material changes be proposed to the remuneration policy. Major shareholders were consulted at the start of 2014 in respect of the replacement LTIP. 
Details of votes cast for and against the resolution to approve last year’s Remuneration report and any matters discussed with shareholders during 
the year are set out in the Annual report on remuneration.

Consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Group
The Committee considers the general basic salary increase for the broader employee population when determining the annual salary increases and 
remuneration for the executive Directors. Employees have not been consulted on the design of the Company’s senior executive remuneration policy 
although the Committee will keep this under review.

62

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc•	Not	applicable

•		A	combination	of	
growth in Group 
profit before tax and 
other financial metrics 
(majority weighting), 
and personal objectives 
(minority weighting)

•		Clawback	

provisions apply
•		LTIP	performance	

measured over three 
years based on 
financial (e.g. EPS) and/
or share price measures 
(e.g. relative TSR)

•		Clawback	

provisions apply

Operation
•		Reviewed	annually,	effective	

Maximum
•		There	is	no	prescribed	maximum	

Performance targets
•	Not	applicable

Summary remuneration policy
The table below summarises the Directors’ remuneration policy for 2014:

Element of 
remuneration
Salary

Purpose and link  
to strategy
•		Reflects	the	value	of	the	
individual and their role

1 January

•		Reflects	skills	and	

•		Takes	periodic	account	of	

practices of companies with 
similar characteristics and 
sector comparators

•		Company	car	allowance,	the	
provision of private medical 
insurance, life assurance and 
critical illness cover

•	Paid	in	cash
•	Not	pensionable

experience over time
•		Provides	an	appropriate	

level of basic fixed income

•		Avoids	excessive	risk	

arising from over reliance 
on variable income

•		To	aid	retention	
and recruitment

•		Incentivises	annual	

delivery of financial and 
strategic goals

•		Maximum	bonus	only	
payable for achieving 
demanding targets

Benefits

Bonus

annual increase. The Committee is 
guided by the general increase for 
the broader employee population 
but on occasions may need to 
recognise, for example, an increase 
in the scale, scope or responsibility 
of a role

•		Current	base	salary	levels	are	set	

out on page 66
•	Not	applicable

•		100	per	cent	of	salary

Long Term
Incentive Plan

•		Aligned	to	main	strategic	
objectives of delivering 
sustainable profit growth 
and shareholder return

•		Annual	grant	of	nil	cost	options	
or performance shares which 
normally vest after three years, 
subject to continued service 
and performance targets

•		100	per	cent	of	salary	

(normal limit)

•		Discretion	to	provide	awards	

up to 200 per cent of salary in 
exceptional circumstances such 
as recruitment or retention
•		Divided	equivalents	may	also	

be payable

SAYE

•		To	encourage	employee	

•		All	employee	saving	and	

•		In	line	with	prevailing	HMRC	limits •	Not	applicable

share ownership 
and therefore 
increase alignment 
with shareholders

share purchase plan approved 
by HMRC

•		Executives	are	also	eligible	
to participate in the Group 
SAYE on the same terms as 
other employees

Share  
Ownership  
Guidelines

Pension

Non-executive 
Director Fees

•		To	provide	alignment	
between executives 
and shareholders

•		Provides	modest	

retirement benefits

•		Opportunity	for	executives	
to contribute to their own 
retirement plan

•		Reflects	time	

commitments and 
responsibilities of 
each role

•		Reflects	fees	paid	by	

similarly sized companies

•		Executive	Directors	are	required	

•	Not	applicable

•	Not	applicable

to build and maintain a 
shareholding equivalent to one 
year’s base salary
•		Defined	contribution/
salary supplement

•	Cash	fee	paid
•		Fees	are	reviewed	on	an	

annual basis

•		Company	contributes	

approximately 15 per cent 
of salary

•		Executives	salary	exchange	on	
same terms as other employees
•		Fee	increases	for	Non-executive	

Directors will not normally exceed 
the average salary increase 
awarded to executive Directors, 
although increases may be above 
this level if there is an increase 
in the time commitment and/or 
responsibility level

•	Not	applicable

•		Not	applicable.	
Non-executive 
Directors do not 
participate in variable 
pay arrangements

63

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcGovernance

Directors’ remuneration policy continued

Notes:
(1)  A description of how the Company intends to implement the policy set out in this table for 2014 is set out in the Annual report on remuneration on page 66.

(2)   The following differences exist between the Company’s policy for the remuneration of executive Directors as set out above and its approach to the payment of 

employees generally:

•		A	lower	level	of	maximum	annual	bonus	opportunity	may	apply	to	employees	other	than	the	executive	Directors	and	certain	senior	executives.

•		Benefits	offered	to	other	employees	generally	comprise	life	assurance,	pension,	and	other	benefits	applicable	in	the	global	territories	in	which	the	Company	operates.

•		UK	employees	participate	in	the	same	arrangements	as	the	Directors.

•		Participation	in	the	LTIP	is	limited	to	the	executive	Directors	and	certain	selected	senior	managers.	Other	employees	are	eligible	to	participate	in	the	Company’s	share	option	

schemes, details of which are provided on page 116.

 In general, these differences arise from the development of remuneration arrangements that are market competitive for the various categories of individuals and the country 
in which they are employed. They also reflect the fact that, in the case of the executive Directors and senior executives, a greater emphasis tends to be placed on performance-
related pay. 

(3)   The choice of the performance metrics applicable to the annual bonus scheme reflect the Committee’s belief that any incentive compensation should be appropriately 

challenging and tied to the delivery of financial metrics and specific individual objectives. 

(4)   The TSR and EPS performance conditions applicable to the LTIP (further details of which are provided on page 66) were selected by the Remuneration Committee on the basis 
that they reward the delivery of long-term returns to shareholders and the Group’s financial growth and are consistent with the Company’s objective of delivering superior 
levels of long-term value to shareholders. The TSR performance condition is monitored on the Committee’s behalf by New Bridge Street (“NBS”) whilst the Group’s EPS growth 
is derived from the audited financial statements.

(5)   The Committee operates the LTIP in accordance with the plan rules and the Listing Rules, and the Committee, consistent with market practice, retains discretion over a number 

of areas relating to the operation and administration of the plan.

(6)   All-employee share plans do not operate performance conditions. Executive Directors are eligible to participate in the Group SAYE on the same terms as other employees. 

(7)   As highlighted above, the Company has a share ownership policy which requires the executive Directors to build up and maintain a target holding equal to 100 per cent of 

base salary. Details of the extent to which the executive Directors had complied with this policy as at 31 December 2013 are set out on page 70.

(8)   For the avoidance of doubt, in approving this Directors’ remuneration policy, authority is given to the Company to honour any commitments entered into with current or 

former Directors (such as the payment of a pension or the vesting/exercise of past share awards) that have been disclosed in previous remuneration reports. Details of any 
payments to former Directors will be set out in the Annual report on remuneration as they arise.

Illustrations of application of remuneration policy
The chart below illustrates how the composition of the executive Directors’ remuneration packages varies at different levels of performance under 
the 2014 policy, both as a percentage of total remuneration opportunity and as a total value:

£1,500,000

£1,000,000

£497,074

£500,000

£1,319,896

31.2%

31.2%

£908,485

22.6%

22.6%

£913,418

30.8%

30.8%

£631,852

22.3%

22.3%

£350,286

£758,845

31.3%

31.3%

£521,493

22.8%

22.8%

£284,141

100%

54.8%

37.6%

100%

55.4%

38.4%

100%

54.4%

37.4%

0

Minimum

On-Target

Maximum

Minimum

On-Target

Maximum

Minimum

On-Target

Maximum

Geraint Anderson

Shatish Dasani

Tim Roberts

Fixed Pay

Annual Bonus

LTIP

Notes:
(1)  The base salary is at 1 January 2014.

(2)    The value of benefits receivable under these scenarios is taken to be the value of benefits received in 2013 (as calculated under the Single Total Figure of Remuneration, set 

out on page 67).

(3)    The on-target level of bonus is taken to be 50 per cent of the maximum bonus opportunity (100 per cent of salary for all executive Directors). 

(4)  The on-target level of vesting under the LTIP is taken to be 50 per cent (being half of the maximum vesting) of the face value of the award at grant.

(5)   The maximum value of the LTIP is taken to be 100 per cent of the face value of the award at grant i.e. the values above do not incorporate any share price 

appreciation assumption.

64

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc	
	
	
	
 
Approach to recruitment and promotions
The remuneration package for a new executive Director – basic salary, benefits, pension, annual bonus and long-term incentive awards – would be 
set in accordance with the terms of the Company’s prevailing approved remuneration policy at the time of appointment. 

Salary would be provided at such a level as is required to attract the most appropriate candidate and may be set initially at a below mid-market level 
on the basis that it may progress towards the mid-market level once expertise and performance have been proven and sustained. Annual bonus 
potential will be limited to 100 per cent of salary and long-term incentives will be limited to 100 per cent of salary, up to 200 per cent in exceptional 
circumstances. In addition, the Committee may offer additional cash and/or share-based elements when it considers these to be in the best interests 
of the Company (and therefore shareholders) to take account of remuneration relinquished when leaving a former employer and would reflect the 
nature, time horizons and performance requirements attaching to that remuneration. Shareholders will be informed of any such payments at the 
time of appointment. 

For an internal executive Director appointment, any variable pay element awarded in respect of their prior role may be allowed to pay out according 
to its terms, adjusted as relevant to take into account the appointment. In addition, any other ongoing remuneration obligations existing prior to 
appointment may continue, provided that they are put to shareholders for approval at the next general meeting of shareholders. 

For external and internal appointments, the Committee may agree that the Company will meet certain relocation expenses as appropriate. 
If appropriate, on the recruitment of a new executive, the Committee may agree to an initial notice period in excess of 12 months, reducing to 
12 months over a specified period.

Service contracts for executive Directors
The service agreements of the executive Directors are not fixed term and are terminable by either side on 12 months’ notice. They include 12 month 
non-compete clauses and standard provisions for summary termination. These contracts make provision, at the Board’s discretion, for early 
termination by way of payment in lieu of 12 months’ notice. In calculating the amount payable to a Director on termination of employment, the 
Board would take into account the commercial interests of the Company and apply usual common law and contractual principles. The Remuneration 
Committee reviews the contractual terms for new executive Directors to ensure these reflect best practice. In summary, the contractual provisions are:

Provision
Notice period
Termination payment
Remuneration entitlements
Change of control

Detailed Terms
12 months
Common law and contractual principles apply
A bonus may be payable (pro-rated where relevant) and outstanding share awards may vest (see below)
No executive Director's contract contains additional provisions in respect of change of control

The annual bonus may be payable with respect to the period of the financial year served although it will be pro-rated and paid at the normal pay-
out date.

Any share-based entitlements granted to an executive Director under the Company’s share plans will be determined based on the relevant plan rules. 
The default treatment under the LTIP is that any outstanding awards lapse on cessation of employment. However, in certain circumstances, such 
as death, disability, redundancy, retirement, sale or transfer of employer or other circumstances at the discretion of the Committee, ‘good leaver’ 
status may be applied. For good leavers, awards will normally vest on the normal vesting date, subject to the satisfaction of the relevant performance 
conditions, and reduced pro-rata to reflect the proportion of the vesting period actually served. However, the Remuneration Committee has discretion 
to determine that awards vest at cessation (e.g. death) and/or to disapply time pro-rating. 

The executive Directors may accept outside appointments, with prior Board approval, provided these opportunities do not negatively impact on the 
individual’s ability to perform his duties at the Company. Whether any related fees are retained by the individual or are remitted to the Company will 
be considered on a case by case basis.

Non-executive Directors
The fees of each of the non-executive Directors is determined by the Chairman and the executive Directors, reflecting the time commitment 
required, the responsibility of each role and the fees paid in comparable companies.

65

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcGovernance

Annual report on remuneration

Implementation of the remuneration policy for the year ending 31 December 2014
A summary of how the Directors’ Remuneration Policy will be applied during the year ending 31 December 2014 is set out below.

Basic salary and benefits (audited)
The Remuneration Committee agreed to increase executive Director base salary levels by 2.8 per cent with effect from 1 January 2014. Current base 
salary levels and those which applied during the year ended 31 December 2013 are as follows:

Geraint Anderson
Shatish Dasani
Tim Roberts

2014
£411,411
£281,566
£237,352

2013
£400,171
£274,030
£231,0001

% increase
2.8%
2.8%
2.8%

1. Corresponding figure for Tim Roberts in 2013 was shown post salary sacrifice

The Group’s employees, in general, are receiving pay rises ranging from 2.8 per cent to 9 per cent depending on promotional increases and 
individual performance.

Pension arrangements
The Company contributes approximately 15 per cent of salary either to a defined contribution arrangement or as a salary supplement for each 
executive Director.

Annual bonus
The maximum bonus potential for the year ending 31 December 2014 will remain at 100 per cent of salary for all executive Directors and the split 
of targets continues to be based on the Group’s financial results, being growth in Group profit before tax (up to 50 per cent of maximum), Group 
operating cash flow (up to 12.5 per cent of maximum), Group average working capital (up to 12.5 per cent of maximum) and specific personal 
objectives (up to 25 per cent of maximum) as set at the beginning of the 2014 financial year. Specific targets relating to these objectives are 
considered commercially sensitive for the 2014 financial year and will be disclosed retrospectively in next year’s Annual Report.

Long-Term Incentives
Consistent with past awards, the extent to which LTIP awards which will be granted in 2014 will vest will be dependent on two independent 
performance conditions with 50 per cent determined by reference to the Company’s Total Shareholder Return (“TSR”) and 50 per cent determined 
by reference to the Group’s earnings per share (“EPS”), as follows:

•		the	TSR	element	of	an	award	will	vest	in	full	if	the	TSR	ranks	in	the	upper	quartile,	as	measured	over	the	three	year	period,	relative	to	the	

constituents of the FTSE SmallCap Index excluding investment trusts at the beginning of that period. This element of the award is reduced to 25 
per cent on a pro rata basis for median performance and is reduced to nil for below median performance; and

•		the	EPS	element	of	an	award	will	vest	in	full	if	EPS	growth	exceeds	inflation,	as	measured	by	the	Retail	Prices	Index,	by	an	average	of	12	per	cent

per annum or more over the three year period. This element of the award is reduced to 25 per cent on a pro rata basis if EPS growth exceeds 
inflation by an average of 7 per cent per annum over the period and is reduced to nil if EPS growth is below this level.

Non-executive Directors (audited)
The Company’s approach to non-executive Directors’ remuneration is set by the Board with account taken of the time and responsibility involved in 
each role, including where applicable the Chairmanship of Board Committees. A summary of current fees is as follows:

Chairman
Base fee
Additional fees:
  Audit Committee Chair fee
  Remuneration Committee Chair fee

2014
£151,870
£41,100

£7,000
£7,000

2013
£147,805
£40,000

£7,000
£7,000

% increase
2.8%
2.8%

0%
0%

66

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc	 
Implementation of the remuneration policy for the year ended 31 December 2013
Remuneration received by Directors (audited)
Directors’ remuneration for the year ended 31 December 2013 was as follows:

£’000
Executive Directors
Geraint Anderson

Shatish Dasani

Tim Roberts

Chairman
Sean Watson

Non-executive Directors
Michael Baunton

Stephen King

John Shakeshaft

David Crowther

2013
2012
2013
2012
2013
2012

2013
2012

2013
2012
2013
2012
2013
2012
2013
2012

Salary/fees

Benefits1

Pension2

Bonus3

Incentives4

Total

400
389
274
266
231
210

148
144

40
39
47
43
47
46
0
16

24
25
25
26
11
11

–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

60
58
42
41
35
32

–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

213
194
146
133
123
105

–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

457
1,018
313
698
192
273

–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

1,154
1,684
800
1,164
592
631

148
144

40
39
47
43
47
46
0
16

1. Taxable benefits
The Directors taxable benefits consist of company car or allowance and private medical cover.

2. Pensions
Employer contributions are paid at approximately 15 per cent of Base Salary. Geraint Anderson and Shatish Dasani receive a pension supplement in 
lieu of a contribution to the pension scheme. 

3. Annual bonus payments for 2013
The annual bonus payments presented in the table below were based on performance against increase in Group profit before tax (up to 50% of 
maximum), Group operating cash flow (up to 25% of maximum), and specific personal objectives (up to 25% of maximum) as measured over the 2013 
financial year. 

Details of actual performance against targets is as follows:

Group profit
Group underlying operating cash flow 1
Personal and strategic objectives 2

Potential
50%
25%
25%

Required for threshold 
bonus (£m)
29.4
36.5

Required for Maximum 
bonus (£m)
34.1
44.7
Personal and strategic targets set at 
the start of 2013 based on the delivery 
of growth, return on capital, strategy 
development, senior team development, 
the delivery of margin improvement 
programmes and health and safety

Actual Result £m
30.2
41
 See 2

Actual payout 
(% of salary)
14.6%
13.8%
25%

Total % of salary

100%

53.4%

1 Excluding amortisation of intangible assets.
2  Following an assessment of the personal objectives at the end of 2013, the Remuneration Committee concluded that all of the targets which had been set at the start of the 
financial year and which remained relevant had been met in full.

67

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcGovernance

Annual report on remuneration continued

4. Vesting of LTIP awards
The figures included in the incentives figure show the value of awards in the year where the achievement of the performance condition is known. 
It therefore includes the shares vested on achievement of the TSR condition that vested during the year and the shares to vest on achievement of 
the EPS condition as at the financial year end. 

Metric
2011 award earnings per share
2010 award total shareholder return 
2010 award earnings per share
2009 award total shareholder return

Threshold target
13.0p
12.5% median ranking
12.0p
12.5% median ranking

Stretch target
14.7p
50% upper quartile ranking
14.0p
50% upper quartile ranking

Actual
14.2p
upper quartile ranking
13.7p
upper quartile ranking

% vesting
39.6%
50%
44.4%
50%

The details of the performance criteria are set out in the “LTIP performance criteria” below.

Executive
Geraint Anderson

2013 performance period

2012 performance period
Shatish Dasani

2013 performance period

2012 performance period
Tim Roberts

2013 performance period

2012 performance period

Year of award  
and measure

Number of shares  
at grant

Number of shares  
vested/to vest

Number of shares  
lapsed/to lapse

Estimated/value of vesting/
vested shares (£’000)

2011 –EPS
2010 –TSR

2010 –EPS
2009 –TSR

2011 –EPS
2010 –TSR

2010 –EPS
2009 –TSR

2011 –EPS
2010 –TSR

2010 –EPS
2009 –TSR

 108,143 
 165,095 
 273,238 
 165,095 
 437,500 
 602,595 

 74,054 
 113,208 
 187,262 
 113,208 
 300,000 
 413,208 

 54,071 
 61,911 
 115,982 
 61,911 
 101,334 
 163,245 

 85,692 
 165,095 
 250,787 
 146,521 
 437,500 
 584,021 

 58,680 
 113,208 
171,888
 100,472 
 300,000 
 400,472 

 42,846 
61,911
104,757
 54,946 
 101,334 
 156,280 

 22,451 
– 
 22,451 
 18,574 
– 
 18,574 

 15,374 
– 
 15,374 
 12,736 
 –
 12,736 

 11,225 
 –
 11,225 
 6,965 
 –
 6,965 

169
288
457
255
763
1,018

116
197
313
175
523
698

84
108
192
96
177
273

The value of vested shares is based on actual share prices at the date of vesting. The estimated value due to vest under the 2011 awards is based on the market value of 197 
pence on 31 December 2013.

LTIP performance criteria
In 2013, LTIP allocations equal to 100 per cent of base pay were awarded to executive Directors. The performance measures attaching to the 
outstanding and recently vested LTIP awards are shown in the table below:

Vesting Criteria
One half on EPS growth in excess of RPI

Full vesting
Zero vesting if below

2010

= 14 pence
= 12 pence

2011

15%
10%

2012

20%
10%

2013

20%
10%

Vesting will increase on a straight line basis between 25% and 100% between the above points

One half on TSR performance against the FTSE Small Cap (excluding Investment Trusts)

Full vesting
Zero vesting if below

upper quartile ranking
median ranking
Vesting will increase on a straight line basis between 25% and 100% between the above points

In addition to the TSR targets, the Committee will consider the Company’s underlying performance to ensure that vesting percentages under this 
part of an award are appropriate.

Awards are measured over a three year period

The LTIP awards granted in 2010 vested at 94.4% on 9 May 2013. The market price on date of vesting was £1.74.

68

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcLong-term incentives granted during the year 
On 17 April 2013, the following LTIP awards were granted to executive Directors

Executive
Geraint Anderson
Shatish Dasani
Tim Roberts

Basis of award 
granted
100% of salary
100% of salary
100% of salary

Share price at date 
of grant1
£1.65
£1.65
£1.65

Number of shares 
over which award 
was granted
242,528
166,079
140,000

Face value of  
award £
400,171
274,030
231,000

% of face value 
that would vest at 
threshold  
performance

Vesting determined by 
performance over
25% TSR and EPS: Three 
financial years to 
25%
31 December 2015
25%

1 the share price used to determine the number of shares to be granted was the closing market price on the day prior to grant (i.e. £1.65).

Outstanding share awards 
The table below sets out details of outstanding share awards held by executive Directors.

As at 31 December 2013, Directors’ interests under the LTIP were as follows:

Geraint Anderson

Shatish Dasani

Tim Roberts

Date of grant
4 May 2010
27 April 2011
25 April 2012
17 April 2013

4 May 2010
27 April 2011
25 April 2012
17 April 2013

4 May 2010
27 April 2011
25 April 2012
17 April 2013

1 January  
2013
330,189
216,285
212,885

759,359
226,415
148,108
146,027

520,550
123,821
108,142
115,068

347,031

Granted 
during the 
year

242,528
242,528

166,079
166,079

140,000
140,000

Lapsed
18,573

Vested
311,616

18,573
12,736

311,616
213,679

12,736
6,965

213,679
116,856

6,965

116,856

31  
December  
2013
–
216,285
212,885
242,528
671,698
–
148,108
146,027
166,079
460,214
–
108,142
115,068
140,000
363,210

Market value at 
31 December 
2013 £
–
426,081
419,383
477,780
1,323,244
–
291,773
287,673
327,176
906,622
–
213,040
226,684
275,800
715,524

Market price at 
grant date  
pence
106
175.25
182.5
164.75

106
175.25
182.5
164.75

106
175,25
182.5
164.75

Vesting date
4 May 2013
27 April 2014
25 April 2015
17 April 2016

4 May 2013
27 April 2014
25 April 2015
17 April 2016

4 May 2013
27 April 2014
25 April 2015
17 April 2016

(1)   The performance conditions for the 2010 awards were met 88.8 per cent satisfied on the EPS target and in full on the TSR target, in total 94.4 per cent of the maximum award. 
The Company settled the awards with new issue shares in respect of the net balance after tax and national insurance. The market price on the date of vesting was 174 pence.

(2)   The targets for the 2011 awards are as set out above under the “Long Term Incentive Plan 2005”. Based on these accounts, subject to Committee review, it is anticipated that 

the awards will vest in part 79.2 per cent in respect of the EPS target. The TSR performance condition will be measured at 26 April 2014.

(3)   The market value at 31 December 2013 represents the total number of shares awarded multiplied by 197 pence being the share price on 31 December 2013. The calculation 

does not take into account the likelihood of vesting.

69

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcGovernance

Annual report on remuneration continued

TT Electronics plc sharesave scheme

Date of grant

1 January 
2013

Granted during 
the year

Lapsed

Exercised

31 December 
2013

G Anderson

1 Oct 10

13,552

S D Dasani

T H Roberts

1 Oct 10
1 Oct 13

1 Oct 10
1 Oct 13

13,552
7,894
–

7,894
7,894
–

7,894

–

–
–
6,040

6,040
–
6,040

6,040

–

–
–
–

–
–
–

–

–

13,552

–
7,894
–

7,894
7,894
–

13,552
–
6,040

6,040
–
6,040

7,894

6,040

Potential gain at 
31 December 
2013 £
11,248

Option price 
pence

114

Exercisable 
between / 
exercised on
1 Nov 15 – 
30 April 16

11,248
–
2,899

2,899
–
2,899

2,899

114
01 Nov 13
149 01 Nov 16 – 
30 April 17

114
01 Nov 13
149 01 Nov 16 – 
30 April 17

(1)  The potential gain at 31 December 2013 represents the total number of shares under option multiplied by 197 pence being the share price on 31 December 2013 less the 

option price. The calculation assumes that the executive Director remains employed and completes the contract.

Payments to past Directors 
No payments were made to past executive Directors during the year ended 31 December 2013.

Payments for loss of office 
No payments were made in respect of loss of office during the year ended 31 December 2013.

Statement of Directors’ shareholdings and share interests (audited)

Beneficially owned 
at 1 January 2013
 560,000 
 708,000 
 130,475 

Beneficially owned 
at 31 December 
2013
 725,156 
 829,144 
 174,303 

Outstanding LTIP 
Awards
 671,698 
 460,214 
 363,210 

Outstanding share 
awards under all 
employee share 
plans
 13,552 
 6,040 
 6,040 

Shareholding as a 
% of salary at 31 
December 2013
357%
596%
149%

Value of beneficially 
owned at 31 
December 2013 
£000’s
 1,429 
 1,633
 343

Basic salary at 31 
December 2013 £
 400,171 
 274,030 
 231,000 

 190,000 
 72,717 
 100,000 
 51,206 

 190,000 
 72,717 
 100,000 
 51,206 

 –  
 –  
 –  
 –  

 –  
 –  
 –  
 –  

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

Executives are required to hold shares in the Company worth 100 per cent of salary and must retain 50 per cent of the net of tax value of any vested 
LTIP shares until the guideline is met. At 31 December 2013, all executive Directors had met the shareholding requirement.

The closing middle market prices for an Ordinary share of 25 pence of the Company on 31 December 2012 and 2013 as derived from the Stock 
Exchange Daily Official List were 144 pence and 197 pence respectively. During 2013 the middle market price of TT Electronics plc Ordinary shares 
ranged between 147 pence and 202 pence.

70

Executive 
Directors
G Anderson
S D Dasani
T H Roberts
Non-executive Directors
S M Watson
M J Baunton
S A King
J C Shakeshaft

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcPerformance graph and table
The following graph shows the cumulative Total Shareholder Return of the Company over the last five financial years relative to the FTSE SmallCap 
Index. The FTSE SmallCap Index has been selected for consistency as it is the index against which the Company’s Total Shareholder Return is 
measured for the purposes of the LTIP. In addition, the Company is a constituent of the Index.

)
£
(
e
u
a
V

l

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

0

Dec 08

Dec 09

Dec 10

Dec 11

Dec 12

Dec 13

TT Electronics

FTSE SmallCap Index (excluding investment trusts)

This graph shows the value, by 31 December 2013, of £100 invested in TT Electronics plc on 31 December 2008 compared with the value of £100 invested in the FTSE SmallCap Index (excluding 
investment trusts). The other points plotted are the values at intervening financial year ends.

Total remuneration figures for Chief Executive
The total remuneration figures for the Chief Executive during each of the last five financial years are shown in the table below. Geraint Anderson 
was in this position for all five years shown. The total remuneration figure includes the annual bonus based on that year’s performance and LTIP 
awards based on three year performance periods ending in the relevant year. The annual bonus payout and LTIP vesting level as a percentage of the 
maximum opportunity are also shown for each of these years. 

Total remuneration (£’000)

Annual bonus (%)

LTIP vesting (%)

2009

516

30%

N/A

2010

771

96%

0%

2011

1,576

96%

100%

2012

1,684

50%

94%

2013

1,154

53%

89.6%

Percentage change in Chief Executive’s remuneration
The table below shows the percentage change in the Chief Executive’s total remuneration (excluding the value of any LTIP and pension benefits 
receivable in the year) between the financial year ending 31 December 2012 and 31 December 2013, compared to that of the average for all 
eligible employees of the Group.

Chief Executive

Average of other employees

% change from 2012 to 2013

Salary

3.0

3.1

Benefits

-4.0

3.0

Annual bonus

9.8

–

71

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
Governance

Annual report on remuneration continued

Relative importance of spend on pay
The following table shows the Company’s actual spend on pay (for all employees) relative to dividends.

Staff costs (£'m)
Dividends (£'m)

2012
143.1
7.3

2013
152.3
8.0

% change
6.4
9.6

The dividends figures relate to amounts payable in respect of the relevant financial year.

External appointments
The executive Directors are encouraged to pursue outside appointments provided that such appointments do not in any way prejudice their ability 
to perform their duties. The extent to which any executive Director is allowed to retain any fees payable in respect of such outside appointments, or 
whether such fees are remitted to the Company, will be assessed on a case-by-case basis.

Consideration by the Directors of matters relating to Directors’ remuneration
The Company’s approach to the Chairman’s and executive Directors’ remuneration is determined by the Board on the advice of the Remuneration 
Committee. The members of the Remuneration Committee (all of whom were independent non-executive Directors) during the year under review 
were as follows:

•		John	Shakeshaft	(Remuneration	Committee	Chairman)

•		Michael	Baunton

•		Sean	Watson

Biographical information on the Committee members is set out on pages 48 and 49.

External advisors
In order to enable the Committee to make informed decisions on executive remuneration, the Committee retained the services of New Bridge 
Street (“NBS”), independent external consultants, to advise on senior executive remuneration matters. NBS, which is part of Aon plc, provides no 
other services to the Company, although another part of the Aon plc provides insurance broking and consultancy services. The Committee is entirely 
comfortable that the provision of these services does not in any way prejudice NBS’ position as independent advisers to the Committee. NBS is a 
member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and abides by the Remuneration Consultants Group Code of Conduct, which requires its advice to 
be objective and impartial.

The fees paid to NBS for providing advice in relation to executive remuneration over the financial year under review amounted to £39,355.

Shareholder voting at AGM
The Committee encourages dialogue with shareholders and will endeavour to consult with major shareholders ahead of any significant changes to 
our remuneration policy.

At the Annual General Meeting held on 9 May 2013, a resolution pertaining to the Directors’ remuneration report was passed on a show of hands. 
Proxy votes cast in respect of this resolutions were as follows:

Number of votes
Remuneration report

For (98.2%)
109,258,221

Discretionary
188,807

Against
1,139,718

Withheld
594,465

Total vote
111,181,211

72

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc	
	
	
Governance

Other statutory disclosures

Directors’ report
This Annual Report includes the Directors’ report and the audited financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2013. Certain information 
required to be disclosed in the Directors’ report is provided in other sections of this Annual Report. This includes the overview, the operating 
and financial reviews, the corporate governance and remuneration reports and specific elements of the financial statements noted below and, 
accordingly, these are incorporated into the Directors’ report by reference.

Strategic report
Details of the Group’s activities and future plans are set out in the Strategic report on pages 1 to 45 of this report. 

The principal operating subsidiaries are listed on page 126. 

Results and dividends 
The Group’s profit on ordinary activities after taxation was £13.0 million (2012: £22.4 million). The audited financial statements of the Group and 
the Company are set out on pages 79 to 126. Further details of the Group’s activities are set out in the Operating and Financial review on pages 30 
to 41. 

The Directors are recommending a final dividend of 3.8 pence per share for the year ended 31 December 2013 (2012: 3.5 pence) to be paid on 
5 June 2014 to shareholders on the register at 23 May 2014 which, together with the interim dividend of 1.6 pence per share paid on 31 October 
2013 (2012: 1.5 pence), makes a total for the year of 5.4 pence (2012: 5.0 pence). 

Acquisitions and disposals 
Completion of the purchase of the 49 per cent minority interest in the Group’s Indian Sensors business, Padmini TT Electronics Private Limited, 
for a consideration of £8.8 million took place on 1 February 2013. This company has since been renamed TT Electronics Sensing and Control 
Private Limited.

Directors
Rules for the appointment and replacement of Directors are set out in the Company’s Articles of Association. Directors are appointed by the Board 
on the recommendation of the Nominations Committee. Directors may also be appointed or removed by the Company by ordinary resolution at a 
general meeting of holders of Ordinary shares. The office of a Director shall be vacated if his resignation is requested by all the other Directors, not 
being fewer than three in number. Further details of the activities of the Nominations Committee are set out on page 56. 

There are no agreements between the Company and its Directors or employees providing for compensation for loss of office or employment that 
occurs as a result of a takeover bid except that provisions of the Company’s share plans may cause options and awards granted under such schemes 
to vest on takeover, subject to the satisfaction of any performance conditions. Further details of the executive Directors’ service contracts can be 
found in the Directors’ remuneration report on page 65. Copies of the executive Directors’ service contracts and letters of appointment of the 
non-executive Directors are available for inspection by any person at the Company’s registered office during normal business hours on any weekday 
(public holidays excepted) and at the Annual General Meeting from 15 minutes before the start of the AGM until its conclusion.

The Group maintains Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance. The Directors of the Company also benefit from a qualifying third party indemnity 
provision in accordance with Section 234 of the Companies Act 2006 and the Company’s Articles of Association. The Company has provided a 
pension scheme indemnity within the meaning of Section 235 of the Companies Act 2006 to directors of associated companies.

Auditors 
In accordance with Section 489 of the Companies Act 2006, KPMG LLP is proposed as statutory auditor of the Company and a resolution for its 
appointment is to be proposed at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting.

The Auditors’ responsibilities are set out on page 78 and should be read in conjunction with those of the Directors as set out at the end of this report. 

Annual General Meeting 
The Annual General Meeting of the Company will be held on 9 May 2014 at the offices of Hudson Sandler Financial and Corporate Communications 
at 11.30 am. The Notice of the Company’s Annual General Meeting accompanies this document. 

Research and development 
The Group carries out research and development in order to develop new products and processes and to substantially improve existing products and 
processes. Further details are given in note 15 to the Consolidated financial statements.

Significant agreements relating to change of control 
The Group has a number of borrowing facilities provided by various banking groups. Some of these facility agreements include change of control 
provisions which, in the event of a change in ownership of the Company, could result in renegotiation or withdrawal of these facilities. 

There are a number of other agreements that may be renegotiated upon a change of control of the Company. None is considered to be significant 
in terms of their potential impact on the business of the Group as a whole. 

73

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcGovernance

Other statutory disclosures continued

Greenhouse gas emissions
For the year ended 31 December 2013, the Group’s greenhouse gas emissions (detailed below) were calculated via the Group’s management 
accounting system, verified by third party supplier invoicing, using the factors for converting energy usage to carbon dioxide equivalent emissions 
published by DEFRA in June 2013.

Emissions resulting from operations and combustion of fuel*
Emissions resulting from the purchase of electricity, heat, steam or cooling
Total

Carbon dioxide  
equivalent (tonnes)
2,831
35,780
38,611

*These figures represent all material emissions. Greenhouse gases emitted as a result of the manufacturing process are not included within this figure since these represent a 
negligible proportion (less than 1.25 per cent) of our emissions overall. For ease of calculation, combustion of fuel from vehicles owned or operated by the Group (company cars) 
has been calculated based on the presumption that all company cars fall within the ‘large’ category and, as a result, has potentially been overstated. 

Intensity ratio
The Group has chosen to adopt emissions per £1 million of revenue as its intensity ratio. 

For 2013, emissions were 72.55 tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent per £1 million of revenue.

Further details are given under Environment on page 44.

Employment
The Group is committed to the fair and equal treatment of all its employees regardless of gender, race, age, religion, disability or sexual orientation. 
Where existing employees become disabled, the policy of the Group is to provide continuing employment and training wherever practicable. 
The Group makes significant efforts to ensure that high standards of employee welfare are maintained worldwide in all its operations, irrespective of 
geography and local market conditions. Together with many other global companies operating in its sector, the Group is a member of the Electronic 
Industry Citizenship Coalition, a leading industry organisation promoting best practices in corporate responsibility, which is committed to raising 
standards of employee welfare in all jurisdictions and at all levels of the supply chain for electronic products. Further details on the Group’s policies 
relating to its employees are given on pages 43 to 44. 

Political contributions
No political contributions were made by the Group during the year. 

Share capital 
The Company’s issued share capital comprises a single class of share capital which is divided into Ordinary shares of 25 pence each. All issued shares 
are fully paid. The share capital during the year is shown in note 24 to the consolidated financial statements. The rights and obligations attaching 
to the Company’s Ordinary shares are set out in the Company’s Articles of Association, a copy of which can be obtained from Companies House 
in the United Kingdom or by writing to the Group General Counsel & Company Secretary. Subject to applicable statutes, shares may be issued with 
such rights and restrictions as the Company may by ordinary resolution decide, or (if there is no such resolution or so far as it does not make specific 
provision) as the Board may decide. Holders of Ordinary shares are entitled to speak at general meetings of the Company, to appoint one or more 
proxies and, if they are corporations, to appoint corporate representatives and to exercise voting rights. Holders of Ordinary shares may also receive a 
dividend and on a liquidation may share in the assets of the Company. In addition, holders of Ordinary shares are entitled to receive the Company’s 
Annual Report and Accounts. Subject to meeting certain thresholds, holders of Ordinary shares may require a general meeting of the Company to be 
held or the proposal of resolutions at Annual General Meetings. 

Authority to allot shares and disapply statutory pre-emption rights 
The Directors will be seeking to renew their authorities to allot unissued shares and to disapply statutory pre-emption rights at the Annual General 
Meeting to be held on 9 May 2014. 

Purchase of own shares 
At the Annual General Meeting held on 9 May 2013, the Company was given authority to purchase up to 15,704,354 of its Ordinary shares until the 
date of its next AGM. No purchases were made during the year by the Company. The Directors will be seeking a new authority for the Company to 
purchase its Ordinary shares at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting. 

Further details regarding the authority to allot shares and disapply statutory pre-emption rights and the purchase of own shares are set out in the 
Notice of the Annual General Meeting which accompanies this document and is available to view on the Company’s website.

Shares held by the Employee Benefit Trust 
The Company has established an employee benefit trust (“EBT”), the trustee of which is Sanne Trust Company Limited, part of Sanne Group. As at 
31 December 2013, the trustee held 111,106 shares with a nominal value of £27,776.50 and an aggregate purchase price of £1.46 per share, 
representing 0.07 per cent of the total issued share capital at that date. These shares will be used to satisfy awards made under the TT Electronics plc 
Restricted Share Plan (“RSP”), the TT Electronics plc Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) or other employee share schemes. The maximum number of 
shares held by the EBT during the year was 1,635,383, of which 1,571,740 were used to satisfy awards under the LTIP. The voting rights in relation to 
these shares are exercisable by the trustee; however, in accordance with investor protection guidelines the trustee abstains from voting. The executive 
Directors as employees of the Company are potential beneficiaries of shares held by the EBT.

74

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcSubstantial shareholding notifications 
The Company had been notified of the following voting rights attaching to TT Electronics plc shares in accordance with the Disclosure and 
Transparency Rules at 10 March 2014 and 31 December 2013.

Lloyds Banking Group
Mondrian Investment Partners Limited
Hargreave Hale
Aberforth Partners LLP
Tweedy, Browne Company LLC
J W Newman
FIL Limited (Fidelity International)

10 March 2014  
Number
8,390,374
7,912,306
8,123,465
8,188,257
7,664,336
–
8,064,855

%
5.3
5.1
5.1
5.1
4.9
<3.0
5.0

31 December 2013 
Number
8,390,374
7,912,306
8,123,465
8,188,257
7,664,336
6,806,254
–

%
5.3
5.1
5.1
5.1
4.9
4.2
–

So far as has been ascertained, no other person or corporation holds or is beneficially interested in any substantial part of the share capital of 
the Company.

Voting rights and restrictions on transfer of shares 
On a show of hands at a general meeting of the Company, every holder of Ordinary shares present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote has 
one vote and on a poll every member present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote has one vote for every Ordinary share held. Further details 
regarding voting at the Annual General Meeting can be found in the Notice of the Annual General Meeting which accompanies this document. 
None of the Ordinary shares carry any special rights with regard to control of the Company. Electronic and paper proxy appointments and voting 
instructions must be received by the Company’s Registrars not later than 48 hours before a general meeting. A shareholder can lose his entitlement 
to vote at a general meeting where that shareholder has been served with a disclosure notice and has failed to provide the Company with 
information concerning interests in those shares. 

The Directors may refuse to register a transfer of a certificated share which is not fully paid, provided that the refusal does not prevent dealings in 
shares in the Company from taking place on an open and proper basis. The Directors may also refuse to register a transfer of a certificated share 
unless the instrument of transfer: (i) is lodged, duly stamped (if stampable), at the registered office of the Company or any other place decided by the 
Directors accompanied by the certificate for the share to which it relates and/or such other evidence as the Directors may reasonably require to show 
the right of the transferor to make the transfer; (ii) is in respect of only one class of shares; (iii) is in favour of a person who is not a minor, bankrupt or a 
person in respect of whom an order has been made on the grounds that such person is suffering from a mental disorder or is otherwise incapable of 
managing their affairs; or (iv) is in favour of not more than four transferees. 

Transfers of uncertificated shares must be carried out using CREST and the Directors can refuse to register a transfer of an uncertificated share in 
accordance with the regulations governing the operation of CREST. 

The Directors may decide to suspend the registration of transfers, for up to 30 days a year, by closing the register of shareholders. The Directors 
cannot suspend the registration of transfers of any uncertificated shares without obtaining consent from CREST.

There are no other restrictions on the transfer of Ordinary shares in the Company except: certain restrictions may from time to time be imposed by 
laws and regulations (for example insider trading laws); pursuant to the Company’s share dealing code whereby the Directors and certain employees 
of the Group require approval to deal in the Company’s shares; and where a shareholder with at least a 0.25 per cent interest in the Company’s 
certificated shares has been served with a disclosure notice and has failed to provide the Company with information concerning interests in 
those shares. 

The Company is not aware of any agreements between shareholders that may result in restrictions on the transfer of Ordinary shares or on 
voting rights.

Articles of Association 
The Company’s Articles of Association may only be amended by special resolution approved at a general meeting of the shareholders. 

UK Corporate Governance Code
The Code is available to view at the website of the Financial Reporting Council, www.frc.org.uk.

Disclosure of information to Auditors
To the best of each Director’s knowledge and belief, there is no audit information relevant to the preparation of the Auditors’ report of which the 
Auditors are unaware and each Director has taken all the steps which might be expected to be aware of such relevant information and to establish 
that the Auditors are also aware of that information.

Approved by the Board on 12 March 2014 and signed on its behalf by: 

Lynton Boardman 
Group General Counsel & Company Secretary

75

Financial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAnnual Report 2013TT Electronics plcStatement of Directors’ responsibilities 

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the Group and parent Company financial statements in accordance with applicable 
law and regulations. Company law requires the Directors to prepare Group and parent Company financial statements for each financial year. Under 
that law they are required to prepare the Group financial statements in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU and applicable law and have 
elected to prepare the parent Company financial statements in accordance with UK Accounting Standards. 

Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the state 
of affairs of the Group and parent Company and of their profit or loss for that period. In preparing each of the Group and parent Company financial 
statements, the Directors are required to: 

  select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently; 

  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent; 

  for the Group financial statements, state whether they have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU; 

  for the parent Company financial statements, state whether applicable UK Accounting Standards have been followed, subject to any 

material departures disclosed and explained in the parent Company financial statements; and 

  prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group and the parent Company 

will continue in business. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the parent Company's transactions 
and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the parent Company and enable them to ensure that its financial 
statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They have general responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard 
the assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and other irregularities. 

Under applicable law and regulations, the Directors are also responsible for preparing a Strategic report, Directors' report, Directors' remuneration 
report and a Directors’ report on corporate governance that complies with that law and those regulations. 

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the Company's website. 
Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

Responsibility statement of the Directors in respect of the Annual Report 
Each of the persons who is a Director at the date of approval of this report confirms that to the best of his or her knowledge: 

  each of the Group and parent Company financial statements, prepared in accordance with IFRS and UK Accounting Standards respectively, 

gives a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the issuer and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole; and 

  the Strategic report and Directors’ report on pages 1 to 75 include a fair review of the development and performance of the business and 
the position of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the 
principal risks and uncertainties that they face. 

In addition, all Directors consider that the Annual Report, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s performance, business model and strategy. 

The coordination and review of Group-wide input into the Annual Report is a key element of the control process upon which the Directors rely and is 
an exercise which spans a period wider than the timetable for compiling the Annual Report itself. This control process incorporates the controls the 
Group operates throughout the year to identify key financial and operational issues and includes: 

  Strategy meetings, held at least twice a year, at which the entire Board is present, resulting in a clear agreement of the Group’s strategy. This includes 

the identification of the key milestones and the related Key performance indicators to be monitored and measured throughout the period. 

  Monthly reviews of business performance conducted by executive management (in consultation with divisional management), 

supplemented by reports highlighting key issues and analysis of the main variances from budget and prior year. 

  Preparation of a detailed budget, reviewed and agreed by management and then the Board, which is used to calibrate strategy 

implementation and against which actual performance is measured. 

  A timetabled process coordinating input from each division, identifying significant market issues and key elements of performance for each 

business area, and appropriately incorporating them into the structure of the Annual Report. 

  The identification of key risks from the risk management process, for inclusion within the Annual Report, ensuring a consistency of approach 

with regard to the risks and the ongoing review programme. 

  A planned Audit Committee sign-off process which incorporates meetings of the Chairman of the Audit Committee with the executive 

Directors and external Auditors to identify and timetable potential issues of significance to be addressed. 

  A timetable for internal distribution and comment on the Annual Report, including those of the members of the Board, the Operating Board, 

key advisers and external Auditors. 

By order of the Board: 

Lynton Boardman 
Group General Counsel & Company Secretary  
12 March 2014 

76

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcIndependent Auditor’s report to the members 
of TT Electronics plc 

1. Our opinion on the financial statements is unmodified  
We have audited the financial statements of TT Electronics plc for the year ended 31 December 2013 set out on pages 79 to 127. In our opinion:  

  the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent Company’s affairs as at 31 December 2013 

and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended;  

  the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by 

the European Union;  

  the parent Company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK Accounting Standards; and  

  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group 

financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.  

2. Our assessment of risks of material misstatement 
In arriving at our audit opinion above on the financial statements the risks of material misstatement that had the greatest effect on our audit 
were as follows: 

Carrying value of goodwill (£63.9 million) 
Refer to page 58 (Audit Committee report), page 86 (Summary of significant accounting policies note) and page 100 (Financial Statements) 

The risk: The carrying value of goodwill is assessed for impairment at least annually. The impairment calculations are based on the discounted 
projected cash flows of the relevant cash-generating units. There is inherent uncertainty and judgement involved in forecasting and discounting 
future cash flows. The key assumptions, estimates and judgements on which the impairment calculations are based, which are inherently uncertain, 
could be inappropriate and the carrying values of goodwill could be overstated as a result.  

Our response: Our audit procedures included, among others, testing the principles and mathematical integrity of the Group's discounted cash flow 
model. We also compared the Group’s assumptions to externally derived data as well as our own assessments, and key inputs such as projected 
economic growth, competition, cost inflation and discount rates. We tested the sensitivity of the impairment calculation to changes in the judgements 
and assumptions used by the Directors. We also assessed whether the Group’s disclosures (see note 14) about the sensitivity of the outcome of the 
impairment assessment to changes in key assumptions properly reflected the risks inherent in the valuation of goodwill.  

Tax liabilities (included within tax creditor of £10.4 million) 
Refer to page 58 (Audit Committee report), page 89 (Summary of significant accounting policies note) and pages 96 (Financial Statements) 

The risk: The Group is subject to income taxes in a number of jurisdictions. The level of current tax and deferred tax recognised requires judgements as 
to the likely outcome of decisions to be made by the tax authorities in the various tax jurisdictions around the world in which the Group operates. 
There is a risk that the judgements on which the provisions are based do not take into account or do not properly reflect the latest available, reliable 
information or an appropriate application of relevant tax legislation, and are either under or overstated as a result. 

Our response: Using the knowledge and experience of our own tax specialists, both at a Group and component level, we challenged the 
appropriateness of the Directors’ assumptions and estimates in relation to tax assets and liabilities including the range of possible amounts that may 
be assessed under tax laws, likely settlement based on the latest correspondence with the relevant tax authorities and the complexity of tax legislation. 
We also assessed whether the Group’s tax disclosures are appropriate and in accordance with relevant accounting standards. 

Product warranty and legal provisions (£5.4 million) 
Refer to page 58 (Audit Committee report), page 89 (Summary of significant accounting policies note) and page 104 (Financial Statements). 

The risk: Provisions are held in respect of product warranty and legal claims. Provisions are recorded based on management’s best estimate of the 
Group’s ultimate liability to settle an obligation. Like other companies in this sector events that have typically led to claims in the past include product 
performance and commercial disputes. The level of judgement involved in determining whether the recognition criteria are met and then in 
calculating the best estimate, coupled with the size of the total provisions balance and the fact movements impact earnings, results in provisions being 
one of the key judgemental areas that our audit is concentrated on.  

Our response: Our audit procedures included amongst others challenging the basis used with reference to the latest available corroborative 
information, obtaining third party correspondence where available and corroborating the provisions recorded in light of our understanding of the 
business gained throughout the audit process. We also assessed whether the Group’s disclosures about provisions and the movements in the year 
were appropriate. 

3. Our application of materiality and an overview of the scope of our audit 
The materiality for the Group financial statements as a whole was set at £1.4 million. This has been determined with reference to a benchmark of 
Group profit before taxation, which we consider to be one of the principal considerations for members of the company in assessing the financial 
performance of the Group. Materiality represents 4.75% of Group profit Group profit before tax adjusted as disclosed on the face of the income 
statement. 

We agreed with the Audit Committee to report to it all corrected and uncorrected misstatements we identified through our audit with a value in 
excess of £0.1 million impacting the income statement and £0.2 million for balance sheet reclassifications only, in addition to other audit 
misstatements below that threshold that we believe warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. 

77

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
Independent Auditor’s report to the members 
of TT Electronics plc continued 

Audits for Group reporting purposes were performed by component Auditors at the key reporting components in the following countries: UK, 
Germany, Austria, France, Mexico, Malaysia, Romania, China and Barbados. In addition, specified audit procedures were performed by component 
Auditors in the USA, India and Japan. These Group procedures covered 99.6% of total Group revenue; 98.6% of Group profit before tax adjusted as 
disclosed on the face of the income statement; and 97% of total Group assets.  

The audits undertaken for Group reporting purposes at the key reporting components of the company were all performed to materiality levels set by, 
or agreed with, the Group audit team. These materiality levels were set individually for each component and ranged from £0.012 m to £1.4m.  

Detailed audit instructions were sent to all the Auditors in these locations. These instructions covered the significant audit areas that should be covered 
by these audits (which included the relevant risks of material misstatement detailed above) and set out the information required to be reported back 
to the Group audit team. The Group audit team visited the following locations: USA (Dallas), Mexico (Mexicali) and Germany (Werne). Telephone 
meetings were also held with the Auditors at these locations and the majority of the other locations that were not physically visited.  

4. Our opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 is unmodified 
In our opinion:  

  the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006; and  

  the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared 

is consistent with the financial statements.  

5. We have nothing to report in respect of the matters on which we are required to report by exception  
Under ISAs (UK and Ireland) we are required to report to you if, based on the knowledge we acquired during our audit, we have identified other 
information in the Annual Report that contains a material inconsistency with either that knowledge or the financial statements, a material 
misstatement of fact, or that is otherwise misleading.  

In particular, we are required to report to you if:  

  we have identified material inconsistencies between the knowledge we acquired during our audit and the Directors’ statement that they 

consider that the Annual Report and financial statements taken as a whole is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the 
information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s performance, business model and strategy; or 

  the section of the Annual Report describing the work of the Group Audit and Risk Committee does not appropriately address matters 

communicated by us to the Audit and Risk Committee. 

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:  

  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from 

branches not visited by us; or  

  the parent Company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with the 

accounting records and returns; or  

  certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or  

  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.  

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review:  

  the Directors’ statement, set out on page 55, in relation to going concern;  

  the part of the Corporate Governance Statement on pages 51 to 55 relating to the company’s compliance with the nine provisions of the 

2010 UK Corporate Governance Code specified for our review. 

We have nothing to report in respect of the above responsibilities. 

Scope of report and responsibilities 
As explained more fully in the Directors’ Responsibilities Statement set out on page 76, the Directors are responsible for the preparation of the 
financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. A description of the scope of an audit of financial statements is 
provided on the Financial Reporting Council’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditscopeukprivate. This report is made solely to the company’s members as 
a body and is subject to important explanations and disclaimers regarding our responsibilities, published on our website at 
www.kpmg.com/uk/auditscopeukco2013a, which are incorporated into this report as if set out in full and should be read to provide an understanding 
of the purpose of this report, the work we have undertaken and the basis of our opinions. 

Anthony J Sykes (Senior Statutory Auditor)  
for and on behalf of KPMG Audit Plc, Statutory Auditor  
Chartered Accountants  

15 Canada Square 
London, E14 5GL  
12 March 2014  

78

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
Consolidated income statement 
for the year ended 31 December 2013 

£million (unless otherwise stated) 

Continuing operations 
Revenue 
Cost of sales 

Gross profit 
Distribution costs 
Administrative expenses 
Other operating income 

Operating profit 
Analysed as: 
Operating profit before exceptional items 
Exceptional items 

Finance income 
Finance costs 

Profit before taxation 
Taxation 

Profit from continuing operations 
Discontinued operations 
(Loss)/profit from discontinued operations 

Profit for the year attributable to owners of the Company 

EPS attributable to owners of the Company – basic 
From continuing operations (p) 
From discontinued operations (p) 

EPS attributable to owners of the Company – diluted 
From continuing operations (p) 
From discontinued operations (p) 

* Re-presented for IAS 19 (revised). 

Note 

2013 

2012* 

3a 

3a 
8 

6 
6 

9 

7 

5 

11 
11 

11 
11 

532.2 
(432.1)

100.1 
(33.7)
(49.0)
1.6 

19.0 

30.2 
(11.2)

2.8 
(3.5)

18.3 
(4.5)

13.8 

(0.8)

13.0 

8.8 
(0.5)

8.3 

8.7 
(0.5)

8.2 

476.9 
(384.8)

92.1 
(32.7)
(35.5)
1.5 

25.4 

28.7 
(3.3)

2.5 
(5.9)

22.0 
(5.9)

16.1 

6.3 

22.4 

10.3 
4.0 

14.3 

10.3 
4.0 

14.3 

79

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
Consolidated statement of comprehensive 
income 
for the year ended 31 December 2013 

£million 

Profit for the year 
Other comprehensive income/(loss) for the year after tax 
Items that are or may be reclassified subsequently to the income statement: 
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations 
Tax on exchange differences 
Loss on hedge of net investment in foreign operations 
Gain/(loss) on cash flow hedges taken to equity less amounts taken to income statement 

Foreign exchange gain on disposals taken to income statement 

Items that will never be reclassified to the income statement: 

Remeasurement of defined benefit pension schemes 

Remeasurement of other post-employment benefits 

Tax on remeasurement of defined benefit pension schemes 

Tax on remeasurement of other post-employment benefits 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Total comprehensive income is entirely attributable to the owners of the Company. 

* Re-presented for IAS 19 (revised). 

Note 

2013 

13.0 

2012* 

22.4 

(1.6)
– 
(0.9)
0.3 

– 

12.9 

(0.3)

(3.9)

0.1 

19.6 

(4.3)
0.1 
(2.8)
(0.5)

(0.2)

(4.3)

– 

(0.4)

– 

10.0 

5 

23 

22 

22 

80

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
 
 
  
 
Consolidated balance sheet 
at 31 December 2013 

£million 

ASSETS 
Non-current assets 
Property, plant and equipment 
Goodwill 
Other intangible assets 
Deferred tax assets 
Total non-current assets 

Current assets 
Inventories 
Trade and other receivables 
Derivative financial instruments 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Total current assets 

Total assets 

LIABILITIES 
Current liabilities 
Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 
Income taxes payable 
Provisions 
Total current liabilities 

Non-current liabilities 
Borrowings 
Deferred tax liability 
Pensions 
Provisions 
Other non-current liabilities 

Total non-current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Net assets 

EQUITY 
Share capital 
Share premium 
Share options reserve 
Hedging and translation reserve 
Retained earnings 
Equity attributable to owners of the Company 
Non-controlling interests 

Total equity 
Approved by the Board of Directors on 12 March 2014 and signed on their behalf by: 

Geraint Anderson  

Shatish Dasani 

Director 

Director 

Note 

2013 

2012 

13  
14  
15  
22  

16  
17  

20  
18  

19  

20  
22  
23  
19  
18  

24  
24  

26  
27  

88.6  
63.9  
18.1  
7.3  

85.9 
65.2 
13.2 
13.1 

177.9  

177.4 

80.0  
74.4  
0.8  
54.5  

209.7  

387.6  

3.9  
104.8  
10.4  
10.0  

129.1  

23.7 
4.7  
20.5  
0.2  
6.1  
55.2  

184.3  

203.3  

39.7  
1.4  
1.2  
17.3  
141.7  

201.3  
2.0  

203.3  

68.2 
67.6 
0.2 
59.1 

195.1 

372.5 

3.8 
99.9 
12.5 
10.5 

126.7 

8.6 
2.4 
36.8 
0.2 
6.7 
54.7 

181.4 

191.1 

39.2 
0.7 
1.5 
19.5 
128.2 

189.1 
2.0 

191.1 

81

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity 
for the year ended 31 December 2013 

Share 
capital 

Share 
premium 

38.8  
– 

38.8  

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
0.4  

39.2  

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

0.5 
– 

0.5 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
0.2 

0.7 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Share 
options 
reserve 

3.6 
– 

3.6 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
– 
(1.3)
(0.8)
– 

1.5 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Hedging 
reserve 

Translation 
reserve 

(11.5)
– 

(11.5)

– 

– 
– 

– 

38.7 
– 

38.7 

– 

(4.3)
0.1 

(2.8)

(0.5)

– 

– 

– 

– 

(0.2)

– 

– 

(0.5)

(7.2)

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

(12.0)

31.5 

– 

– 

– 

0.3 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(1.6)

(0.9)

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

0.3 

(2.5)

Retained 
earnings 

119.3  
– 

Sub- 
total 

189.4  
– 

119.3  

189.4  

22.4  

22.4  

Non-
controlling 
interest 

2.0 
– 

2.0 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 

(4.3) 
0.1  

(2.8) 

(0.5) 

(0.2) 

(4.3) 

(4.3) 

(0.4) 

(4.7) 

(0.4) 

(12.4) 

(7.3) 
(1.1) 
– 
– 
(0.4) 

(7.3) 
(1.1) 
(1.3) 
(0.8) 
0.2  

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

Total 

191.4 
– 

191.4 

22.4 

(4.3)
0.1 

(2.8)

(0.5)

(0.2)

(4.3)

(0.4)

(12.4)

(7.3)
(1.1)
(1.3)
(0.8)
0.2 

128.2  

13.0  

189.1  
13.0  

2.0 

– 

191.1 
13.0 

– 

– 

– 

(1.6) 

(0.9) 

0.3  

12.9  

12.9  

(0.3) 

(0.3) 

(3.9) 

(3.9) 

0.1  

8.8  

0.1  

6.6  

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

(1.6)

(0.9)

0.3 

12.9 

(0.3)

(3.9)

0.1 

6.6 

(8.0)
(0.1)
(0.1)
(0.2)
1.0 

– 
– 
– 
– 
0.5  

39.7  

– 
– 
– 
– 
0.7 

1.4 

– 
– 
(0.1)
(0.2)
– 

1.2 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

(8.0) 
(0.1) 
– 
– 
(0.2) 

(8.0) 
(0.1) 
(0.1) 
(0.2) 
1.0  

(11.7)

29.0 

141.7  

201.3  

2.0 

203.3 

£million 

At 1 January 2012 
Impact of changes in accounting policy 

Restated balance as at 1 January 2012 

Profit for the year* 
Other comprehensive income 
Exchange differences on translation 
of foreign operations 
Tax on exchange differences 
Net loss on hedge of net investment in 
foreign operations 
Net loss on cash flow hedges taken to equity 
less amounts taken to income statement 
Foreign exchange gain on disposals taken to 
income statement 
Remeasurement of defined benefit pension 
scheme 
Tax on remeasurement of pension deficit 
movement 
Total other comprehensive income 

Transactions with owners recorded directly 
in equity 
Equity dividends paid by the Company 
Change in fair value of non-controlling interest 
Share-based payments 
Deferred tax on share-based payments 
New shares issued 

At 31 December 2012 
Profit for the year 

Other comprehensive income 
Exchange differences on translation 
of foreign operations 
Net loss on hedge of net investment in 
foreign operations 
Net gain on cash flow hedges taken to equity 
less amounts taken to income statement 
Remeasurement of defined benefit pension 
schemes 
Remeasurement of other post-employment 
benefits 
Tax on remeasurement of defined benefit 
pension schemes 
Tax on remeasurement of other post-
employment benefits 
Total other comprehensive income 

Transactions with owners recorded directly 
in equity 

Equity dividends paid by the Company 
Change in fair value of non-controlling interest 
Share-based payments 
Deferred tax on share-based payments 
New shares issued 

At 31 December 2013 

* Re-presented for IAS 19 (revised). 

82

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcConsolidated cash flow statement 
for the year ended 31 December 2013 

£million 

Note 

2013 

2012* 

Cash flows from operating activities 
Profit for the year 
Taxation  
Net finance costs 
Exceptional items 
(Profit)/loss from discontinued operations 
Operating profit from continuing operations before exceptional items 
Adjustments for: 
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 
Amortisation of intangible assets 
Impairment of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets 
Other items 
Increase in inventories 
(Increase)/decrease in receivables 
Increase/(decrease) in payables 

Operating cash flow from continuing operations before exceptional payments 
Operating cash flow from discontinued operations 
Special payments to pension funds 
Exceptional costs 

Net cash generated from operations 
Net income taxes paid 

Net cash flow from operating activities 

Cash flows from investing activities 
Interest received 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment and grants received 
Development expenditure 
Purchase of other intangibles 
Acquisitions of businesses 
Disposal of subsidiaries 
Deferred consideration (paid)/received 

Net cash flow from investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities 
Issue of share capital 
Interest paid 
Repayment of borrowings 
Proceeds from borrowings 
Other items 
Finance leases 
Dividends paid by the Company 

Net cash flow from financing activities 
Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year 
Exchange differences 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year 

Cash and cash equivalents comprise 
Cash at bank and in hand 
Bank overdrafts 

The consolidated cash flow statement includes cash flows from both continuing and discontinued operations. 

* Re-presented for IAS 19 (revised). 

13.0 
4.5 
0.7 
11.2 
0.8 

30.2 

16.8 
4.4 
0.4 
0.4 
(13.8)
(7.2)
11.6 

42.8 
–  
(3.9)
(6.1)

32.8 
(2.5)

30.3 

0.1 
(20.3)
0.6 
(5.2)
(4.2)
(8.3)
(4.1)
(0.1)

(41.5)

0.9 
(0.8)
(0.8)
17.4 
(1.2)
(0.1)
(8.0)

7.4 

(3.8)
59.1 
(0.8)

54.5 

54.5 
– 
54.5 

13  
15  
13, 15 

13  

15  
15  

24  

25  

28  
28  
28  

20  

22.4 
5.9 
3.4 
3.3 
(6.3)

28.7 

15.8 
4.6 
0.1 
(0.3)
(3.5)
1.1 
(1.1)

45.4 
(8.5)
(3.7)
(4.1)

29.1 
(2.3)

26.8 

0.6 
(18.7)
0.3 
(4.8)
(1.3)
(3.0)
43.9 
0.2 

17.2 

0.2 
(2.0)
(62.0)
30.6 
(2.4)
(0.1)
(7.3)

(43.0)

1.0 
58.8 
(0.7)

59.1 

59.1 
–  

59.1 

83

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 

1 Basis of preparation 

a) Basis of accounting 
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared on a historical cost basis modified by the revaluation of financial assets and derivatives 
held at fair value and by the revaluation of certain property, plant and equipment at the transition date to International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRS). The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRS as issued by the International Accounting 
Standards Board (IASB) and interpretations issued by the International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) of the IASB, as 
adopted by the European Union, and in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006. 

The financial statements set out on pages 79 to 120 have been prepared using consistent accounting policies, except for the adoption of new 
accounting standards and interpretations and adoption of amendments to published standards and interpretations noted below.  

Adoption of new accounting standards and interpretations becoming effective in the period: 

IFRS 13 “Fair value measurement”. The Group adopted the new standard on 1 January 2013. The standard constitutes guidance on fair value 
measurement and disclosure requirements.  

Adoption of amendments to existing accounting standards and interpretations becoming effective in the period: IAS 1 (revised) “Presentation of 
financial statements”. The Group adopted the amendment to the standard on 1 January 2013. The amendment relates to changes in disclosure of 
items of other comprehensive income.  

IAS 19 (revised) “Employee benefits”. The Group adopted the amendments to the standard on 1 January 2013. See below for more details.  

IFRS 7 (revised) “Financial instruments: disclosures”. The Group has adopted the amendment to the standard on 1 January 2013. The amendments 
specify certain minimum disclosure requirements in relation to netting of financial instruments. 

“Improvements to IFRSs”. The Group adopted the improvements to IFRSs on 1 January 2013. 

Adoption of new and amendments to published standards and interpretations effective for the Group for the year ended 31 December 2013 did 
not have any impact on the financial position or performance of the Group with the exception of the adoption of IAS 19 (revised). Implementation of 
the standard had the following impact on the income statement: 

  Under previous IAS 19, interest cost on the defined benefit obligation and an expected return on plan assets were recognised in profit or loss 
within finance cost and finance income respectively. Under IAS 19R, these two amounts have been replaced by a single measure called “net 
interest” calculated on the net defined benefit liability/(asset). This change affects the difference between actual and expected returns on plan 
assets, which is recognised in full within OCI as part of remeasurements; 

  The reclassification of the administration costs of the defined benefit scheme, including the levy for the Pension Protection Fund, from Finance 

expense to Administrative expenses within operating profit. 

As a result of these amendments, the comparative financial information in the income statement and OCI has been restated for the year ending 
2012. The effect of the above on profit or loss was to increase finance costs by £1.4 million, reclassify £0.7 million of pension administration costs 
from net finance costs to Administrative expenses within operating profit and reduce remeasurements of the net defined benefit liability in OCI by 
£1.4 million.  

As a result of the above, the tax expense in the income statement has decreased by £0.3 million and the deferred tax charge in OCI has increased by 
£0.3 million. The effect on the cash flow statement of the amended standard was an adjustment to profit before tax and the operating reconciling 
items. There was no effect on the net cash from operating activities. The effect on the statement of changes in equity of the amended standard was 
an adjustment to retained earnings, as explained above. The effect on EPS was to reduce earnings per share by 0.7 pence per share. 

b) Basis of consolidation  
The consolidated financial statements set out the Group’s financial position as at 31 December 2013 and the Group’s financial performance for the 
year ended 31 December 2013. 

Subsidiaries are those enterprises controlled by the Group. Control exists when the Group has the power, directly or indirectly, to govern the financial 
and operating policies of an enterprise so as to obtain benefits from its activities. Subsidiaries are consolidated from the date on which control is 
transferred to the Group and cease to be consolidated from the date on which control is transferred out of the Group. 

All intercompany balances and transactions, including unrealised profits arising from intra-group transactions, have been eliminated in full. Unrealised 
losses are eliminated in the same way as unrealised gains except that they are only eliminated to the extent that there is no evidence of impairment. 

84

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc1 Basis of preparation (continued) 

c) Going concern 
The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position are set on pages 4 to 39. 
The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are described in the Financial review on pages 40 to 41. 
In addition, note 21 to the financial statements includes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its capital; its financial risk 
management objectives; details of its financial instruments and hedging activities; and its exposures to credit risk and liquidity risk. 

The Group had a net cash balance of £26.9 million at 31 December 2013 (2012: £46.7 million), with available financial headroom of £169.7 million. 
Given the considerable financial resources available, together with long-term partnerships with a number of key customers and suppliers across 
different geographic areas and industries, the Directors believe that the Group is well placed to manage its business risks successfully. 

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources and financial headroom to continue in operational existence 
for the foreseeable future. Thus they continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the annual financial statements. Further 
details are contained in the Directors’ report on page 55. 

d) New standards and interpretations not yet adopted 
The Group does not consider that any standard, amendment or interpretation issued by the IASB, but not yet applicable, will have a significant impact 
on the financial statements. 

e) Change in accounting policies 
There have been no changes to accounting policies during the year except for the adoption of new and amended standards and interpretations as 
disclosed in note 1(a). 

f) Significant accounting judgements and estimates 
Judgements 
Determining many of the amounts included in the consolidated financial statements involves the use of judgements. These judgements are based 
on management’s best knowledge of the relevant facts and circumstances having regard to prior experience, but actual results may differ from the 
amounts included in the consolidated financial statements. Other than the key sources of estimation uncertainty shown below, the Directors believe 
that there were no material transactions or events during the year which required critical judgements in applying the Group’s accounting policies.  

Estimation uncertainty  
The preparation of the consolidated financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires management to make estimates and assumptions that 
affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities at the date of the consolidated financial statements and reported amounts of revenues and 
expenses during the reporting period. Actual outcomes could differ from these estimates. In particular, information about significant areas of 
estimation uncertainty made by the Directors in preparing the consolidated financial statements is shown below: 

  Note 9 – Taxation. Accruals for tax contingencies require management to make judgements and estimates in relation to tax audit issues and 
exposures. Amounts accrued are based on management’s interpretation of country-specific tax law and the likelihood of settlement. Tax 
benefits are not recognised unless the tax positions are probable of being sustained. Once considered to be probable, management reviews 
each material tax benefit to assess whether a provision should be taken against full recognition of the benefit on the basis of potential 
settlement through negotiation and/or litigation. All such provisions are included in current liabilities; 

  Note 14 – Impairment of goodwill. The carrying amount of goodwill has been tested for impairment by estimating the value in use of the 

cash-generating units to which it has been allocated. Note 14 outlines the significant assumptions made in performing the impairment tests; 

  Note 15 – Other intangible assets. The recoverability of capitalised development costs is dependent on assessments of the future commercial 

viability of the relevant products and processes;  

  Note 19 – Provisions. The Group makes appropriate provision on a consistent basis for risks of product liability, litigation, restructuring, credit risk 

and other normal trading exposures with estimates being made regarding the timing of future payments; 

  Note 22 – Deferred tax. The recognition of deferred tax assets is dependent on assessments of future taxable income in the relevant countries 

concerned; and 

  Note 23 – Defined benefit pension obligations. The defined benefit pension obligations are calculated using a number of assumptions, 

including future inflation, salary increases and mortality and the obligation is then discounted to its present value using an assumed discount 
rate. The pension deficit has been calculated using the assumptions set out in note 23. 

85

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

2 Summary of significant accounting policies 
The following significant accounting policies have been applied in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements. These accounting policies 
have been consistently applied across the Group. 

a) Goodwill  
Goodwill arising on the acquisition of a business, representing the difference between the cost of acquisition and the fair value of the identifiable 
net assets acquired, is capitalised and is tested annually for impairment. Goodwill is not amortised, and any impairment losses are not subsequently 
reversed. The net book value of goodwill at the date of transition to IFRS has been treated as deemed cost. On the subsequent disposal or 
discontinuance of a previously acquired business, the relevant goodwill is dealt with in the Consolidated income statement except for the goodwill 
already charged to reserves.  

Negative goodwill arising on the acquisition of a business is credited to the Consolidated income statement on acquisition. 

b) Other intangible assets 
Intangible assets acquired as part of a business combination are stated in the balance sheet at their fair value at the date of acquisition less 
accumulated amortisation.  

Expenditure on research activities undertaken with the prospect of gaining new scientific or technical knowledge and understanding is recognised in 
the income statement as incurred. Expenditure on development activities, whereby research findings are applied to a plan or design for the production 
of new or substantially improved products and processes, is capitalised if the product or process is technically and commercially feasible and the Group 
has sufficient resources to complete development. The expenditure capitalised includes the cost of materials, direct labour and an appropriate 
proportion of overheads. Other development expenditure is recognised in the income statement as incurred. Capitalised development expenditure is 
stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses. The carrying values of intangible assets are tested for impairment whenever 
there is an indication that they may be impaired.  

Acquired computer software licences for use within the Group are capitalised as an intangible asset on the basis of the costs incurred to acquire and 
bring to use the specific software. Costs that are directly associated with the implementation of identifiable and unique software products controlled 
by the Group, and that will probably generate economic benefits exceeding costs beyond one year, are recognised as intangible assets. Capitalised 
software development expenditure is stated at cost less accumulated amortisation. 

The amortisation rates for intangible assets are: 

Acquired patents and licences 

up to 10 years  

Product development costs  

5 years  

Customer relationships  

Software 

3 to 8 years  

3 to 5 years 

Amortisation is charged on a straight-line basis.  

With effect from 1 July 2012 the amortisation period for product development costs was changed from 3 years to 5 years, as this more accurately 
reflects the useful economic lifetime of the underlying products. 

c) Foreign currency translation 
The functional currency for each entity in the Group is determined with reference to the currency of the primary economic environment in which 
it operates. Transactions in currencies other than the functional currency are initially recorded at the functional currency rate ruling at the date of 
the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are retranslated at the rate of exchange ruling at the balance sheet 
date. Exchange gains and losses on settlement of foreign currency transactions translated at the rate prevailing at the date of the transactions, or the 
translation of monetary assets and liabilities at period end exchange rates, are taken to the income statement. Non-monetary assets and liabilities 
denominated in foreign currencies that are stated at historical cost are translated to the functional currency at the foreign exchange rate ruling at 
the date of the transaction. 

On consolidation, income statements of subsidiaries are translated into sterling, at average rates of exchange. Balance sheet items are translated 
into sterling at period end exchange rates. Exchange differences on the retranslation are taken to equity. Exchange differences on foreign currency 
borrowings financing those net investments are also dealt with in equity and are reported in the statement of comprehensive income. All other 
exchange differences are charged or credited to the income statement in the year in which they arise. On disposal of an overseas subsidiary any 
cumulative exchange movements relating to that subsidiary held in the translation reserve are transferred to the consolidated income statement.  

86

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
 
2 Summary of significant accounting policies (continued) 

d) Property, plant and equipment  
Initial measurement 
Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. The cost of a tangible fixed asset comprises 
its purchase price and any costs directly attributable to bringing it into working condition for its intended use. The cost of self-constructed assets 
includes the cost of materials, direct labour and an appropriate proportion of production overheads. 

Depreciation 
The cost of each item of property, plant and equipment is depreciated over its useful life. Depreciation is charged to the income statement so as 
to write-off the cost less estimated residual value on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of the asset. Depreciation commences on the 
date the assets are ready for use within the business and the asset carrying values are reviewed for impairment when there is an indication that they 
may be impaired. Freehold land is not depreciated. 

The depreciation rates of assets are as follows 

Freehold buildings 

Leasehold buildings 

2% 

2% (or over the period of the lease if less than 50 years)  

Plant and equipment 

10% to 33 1/3% 

Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of qualifying assets that take a substantial period of time to get 
ready for their intended use are capitalised as part of the cost of the respective asset. 

e) Investment property 
Property held to earn rental income rather than for the purpose of the Group’s principal activities is classified as investment property. 
Investment property is recorded at cost less accumulated depreciation and any recognised impairment loss. The depreciation policy is consistent with 
those described for other Group properties. The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted, if appropriate, at each balance 
sheet date. 

Investment properties are derecognised when either they have been disposed of or when the investment property is permanently withdrawn from 
use and no future economic benefit is expected from its disposal. The difference between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying amount of the 
asset is recognised in the income statement in the period of derecognition. 

f) Leases  
Finance leases, which transfer to the Group substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the leased items, are capitalised at the 
commencement of the lease. Plant and equipment acquired by way of finance lease is stated at an amount equal to the lower of its fair value and the 
present value of the minimum lease payments at inception of the lease, less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. The capital elements 
of future obligations under leases and hire purchase contracts are included as liabilities in the balance sheet. Lease payments are apportioned 
between the finance charge and reduction of the lease liability so as to achieve a constant rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability. 
Finance charges are charged directly against income. Capitalised lease assets are depreciated over the shorter of the estimated useful life of the asset 
or the lease term. All other leases are treated as operating leases and the cost is expensed to the income statement as incurred. 

g) Government grants  
Government grants relating to non-current assets are treated as deferred income and credited to the income statement by equal instalments over the 
anticipated useful lives of the assets to which the grants relate. Other grants are credited to the income statement over the period of the project to 
which they relate.  

h) Inventories  
Inventories are valued at the lower of cost, including related overheads, and net realisable value. Cost comprises direct materials and, where applicable, 
direct labour costs and the overheads incurred in bringing inventories to their present location and condition. Cost is calculated on a weighted average 
cost basis.  

i) Trade and other receivables  
Trade receivables are carried at original invoice price (which is the fair value of the consideration receivable) less provision made for impairment 
of these receivables. A provision for impairment of trade receivables is established when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to 
collect all amounts due according to the original terms of the receivables. The amount of the provision is the difference between the original carrying 
amount and the recoverable amount, being the present value of expected cash flows receivable. The amount of the provision is recognised in the 
income statement. 

j) Cash and cash equivalents  
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash at bank and in hand, short-term deposits held on call or with maturities of less than three months 
at inception and highly liquid investments that are readily convertible into known amounts of cash and are subject to insignificant risk of changes 
in value, and bank overdrafts.  

87

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

2 Summary of significant accounting policies (continued) 

k) Deferred taxation  
Deferred taxation is provided on taxable temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities in the financial statements and 
their corresponding tax bases. No provision is made for deferred tax which would become payable on the distribution of retained profits by overseas 
subsidiaries where the timing of the reversal of the temporary difference can be controlled and it is probable that the temporary difference will not 
reverse in the foreseeable future. Deferred tax is measured using the tax rates expected to apply when the asset is realised or the liability settled based 
on tax rates enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date. However, deferred tax is not provided on the initial recognition of goodwill, 
nor on the initial recognition of an asset or liability unless the related transaction is a business combination or affects tax or accounting profit. 

A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the asset can 
be utilised or that they will reverse. Deferred tax assets are reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that the related tax benefit will 
be realised.  

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset if a legally enforceable right exists to set off current tax assets against current tax liabilities and the 
deferred taxes relate to the same taxable entity and the same taxation authority. 

l) Borrowings  
Borrowings are initially recognised at the fair value of the consideration received less directly attributable transaction costs. After initial recognition, 
borrowings are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. 

m) Trade payables  
Trade payables are carried at the amounts expected to be paid to counterparties.  

n) Employee benefits 
Defined benefit plans 
The Group operates defined benefit post-retirement benefit schemes and defined contribution pension schemes. 

The liability recognised in the balance sheet for defined benefit schemes is the present value of schemes’ liabilities less the fair value of schemes’ 
assets. The operating and financing costs of defined benefit schemes are recognised separately in the income statement. Operating costs comprise 
the current service cost, any gains or losses on settlement or curtailments, and past service costs where benefits have vested. Net interest income and 
expense on net defined benefit assets and liabilities is determined by applying discount rates used to measure defined benefit obligations at the 
beginning of the year to net defined benefit assets and liabilities at the beginning of the year and is included in finance income and costs. 
Remeasurements arising from defined benefit plans comprise actuarial gains and losses, the return on plan assets (excluding interest) and the effect 
of the asset ceiling (if any, excluding interest). The Group recognises them immediately in other comprehensive income and all other expenses related 
to defined benefit plans in employee benefit expenses in profit or loss.  

Defined contribution plans 
A defined contribution plan is a post-employment benefit plan under which an entity pays fixed contributions into a separate entity and will have 
no legal or constructive obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions to defined contribution pension plans are recognised in the 
income statement in the periods during which services are rendered by employees.  

Termination benefits 
Termination benefits are recognised as an expense when the Group is committed demonstrably, without realistic possibility of withdrawal, to a formal 
detailed plan to either terminate employment before the normal retirement date, or to provide termination benefits as a result of an offer made to 
encourage voluntary redundancy. Termination benefits for voluntary redundancies are recognised as an expense if the Group has made an offer of 
voluntary redundancy, it is probable that the offer will be accepted, and the number of acceptances can be estimated reliably.  

Short-term employee benefits 
Short-term employee benefit obligations are measured on an undiscounted basis and are expensed as the related service is provided. A liability 
is recognised for the amount expected to be paid under short-term cash bonus or profit-sharing plans if the Group has a present legal or constructive 
obligation to pay this amount as a result of past service provided by the employee, and the obligation can be estimated reliably. 

Share-based payments  
Certain employees of the Group receive part of their remuneration in the form of share-based payment transactions, whereby employees render 
services in exchange for shares or rights over shares (equity-settled transactions). The cost of equity-settled transactions with employees is measured 
at fair value at the date at which they are granted. The fair value of share awards with market-related vesting conditions is determined by an external 
consultant and the fair value at the grant date is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period based on the Group’s estimate of shares 
that will eventually vest. The estimate of the number of awards likely to vest is reviewed at each balance sheet date up to the vesting date at which 
point the estimate is adjusted to reflect the actual outcome of awards which have vested. No adjustment is made to the fair value after the vesting 
date even if the awards are forfeited or not exercised. 

88

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
 
2 Summary of significant accounting policies (continued) 

o) Own shares 
Own equity instruments which are re-acquired (own shares) are recognised at cost and deducted from equity. No gain or loss is recognised in 
the income statement on the purchase, sale, issue or cancellation of the Group’s own equity instruments. Any difference between the carrying 
amount and the consideration paid to acquire such equity instruments is recognised within equity. 

p) Provisions 
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event, and it is probable that an outflow 
of resources will be required to settle the obligation and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount. If the effect of the time value of money is 
material, provisions are determined by discounting the expected future cash flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the 
time value of money and, where appropriate, the risks specific to the liability. Where discounting is used, the increase in the provision due to the 
passage of time is recognised as a finance cost. 

q) Revenue  
Revenue is measured at the fair value of the right to consideration, usually the invoiced value, for the provision of goods and services to external 
customers excluding value added tax and other sales related taxes and is recognised when the significant risks and rewards of ownership have 
transferred to the customer. In most cases this coincides with the transfer of legal title of the goods. Revenue for services is recognised as the 
services are rendered. 

r) Finance income 
Finance income comprises interest income on funds invested and foreign exchange gains. Interest income is recognised as it accrues. 

s) Finance costs 
Finance costs comprise interest expense on borrowings which are not capitalised under the borrowing costs policy, the calculated interest income on 
pension assets net of the calculated interest expense on pension liabilities and foreign exchange losses. 

t) Income tax 
Income tax for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Income tax is recognised in the income statement except to the extent that it relates to 
items charged or credited directly to equity, in which case it is recognised in equity. Current tax expense is the expected tax payable on the taxable 
income for the year and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years. 

u) Dividends 
Dividends are recognised as a liability in the period in which they are approved by shareholders. Dividends receivable are recognised when the Group’s 
right to receive payment is established. 

v) Discontinued operations  
The Group reports a business as a discontinued operation when it has been disposed of in a period, or its future sale is considered to be highly 
probable at the balance sheet date, and results in the cessation of a major line of business or geographical area of operation.  

89

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

2 Summary of significant accounting policies (continued) 

w) Financial instruments 
Recognition 
The Group recognises financial assets and liabilities on its balance sheet when it becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. 

Financial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount is reported in the balance sheet when there is a legally enforceable right to set off the 
recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis, or realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. 

Measurement 
When financial assets and liabilities are initially recognised, they are measured at fair value being the consideration given or received plus directly 
attributable transaction costs.  

In determining estimated fair value, investments are valued at quoted bid prices on the trade date. When quoted prices on an active market are not 
available, fair value is determined by reference to price quotations for similar instruments traded. 

Loans and receivables comprise loans and advances other than purchased loans. Originated loans and receivables are initially recognised in 
accordance with the policy stated above and subsequently re-measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. Allowance for 
impairment is estimated on a case-by-case basis. 

The Group uses derivative financial instruments such as forward foreign exchange contracts to hedge risks associated with foreign exchange 
fluctuations. These are designated as cash flow hedges. At the inception of the hedge relationship, the Group documents the relationship between 
the hedging instrument and the hedged item, along with its risk management objectives and its strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. 
Furthermore, at the inception of the hedge and on an ongoing basis, the Group documents whether the hedging instrument that is used in a hedging 
relationship is highly effective in offsetting changes in cash flows of the hedged item. 

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges are deferred in equity. The gain 
or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the income statement. 

Amounts deferred in equity are recycled in the income statement in the periods when the hedged item is recognised in the income statement, in the 
same line of the income statement as the recognised hedged item. However, when the forecast transaction that is hedged results in the recognition 
of a non-financial asset or a non-financial liability, the gains and losses previously deferred in equity are transferred from equity and included in the 
initial measurement of the cost of the asset or liability. 

Hedge accounting is discontinued when the Group revokes the hedging relationship, the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated, 
or exercised, or no longer qualifies for hedge accounting. Any cumulative gain or loss deferred in equity at that time remains in equity and is 
recognised when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected 
to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was deferred in equity is recognised immediately in the income statement. 

Derecognition 
A financial asset is derecognised when the Group loses control over the contractual rights that comprise that asset. This occurs when the rights are 
realised, expire or are surrendered. A financial liability is derecognised when it is extinguished. Originated loans and receivables are derecognised on 
the date they are transferred by the Group. 

Impairment of financial assets 
The Group assesses at each balance sheet date whether there is any objective evidence that a financial asset or group of financial assets is impaired. 
A financial asset or group of financial assets is deemed to be impaired if, and only if, there is objective evidence of impairment as a result of one or 
more events that has occurred after the initial recognition of the asset (an incurred “loss event”) and that loss event has an impact on the estimated 
future cash flows of the financial asset or group of financial assets that can be reliably estimated. 

x) Business combinations 
Business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method. Goodwill on business combinations is recognised as the fair value of the 
consideration transferred less the fair value of the identifiable assets and liabilities acquired, and is recognised as an asset in the consolidated Balance 
Sheet. Costs relating to the acquisition are recognised as expenses in the consolidated income statement as incurred. 

Acquisitions and disposals of non-controlling interests that do not result in a change of control are accounted for as transactions with owners in their 
capacity as owners and therefore no goodwill is recognised as a result of such transactions. The adjustments to non-controlling interests are based on 
a proportionate amount of the net assets of the subsidiary. Any difference between the price paid or received and the amount by which non-
controlling interests are adjusted is recognised directly in equity and attributed to the owners of the parent. 

90

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
3 Segmental reporting  

As part of its strategic review in the first half of 2013, the Group is now organised into three divisions, as shown below, according to the nature of 
the products and services provided. Each of these divisions represents an operating segment in accordance with IFRS 8 “Operating segments” and 
there is no aggregation of segments. The chief operating decision maker is the Board of Directors. The operating segments are: 

  Sensing and Control – the provision of integrated and intelligent solutions meeting customer requirements comprising sensors which convert 

physical variables into electronic signals and controls that process input from the sensor and instruct systems; 

  Components – specialist resistive and magnetic components and microcircuits, connectors and interconnection systems; and 

  Integrated Manufacturing Services – the provision of global electronics manufacturing capability with logistics and integrated solutions. 
The accounting policies of the reportable segments are the same as the Group’s accounting policies as shown in note 2. 

The key performance measure of the operating segments is operating profit before exceptional items. The Group reports non-trading income 
or expenditure as exceptional when the size, nature or function of an item or aggregation of similar items is such that separate presentation is relevant 
to an understanding of its financial position. Segment operating profit represents the profit earned by each segment after allocation of central head 
office administration costs and is reviewed by the chief operating decision maker.  

Group financing (including finance costs and finance income) and income taxes are managed on a Group basis and are not allocated 
to operating segments. 

Goodwill is allocated to the individual cash-generating units which are smaller than the segment which they are part of. 

a) Income statement information – continuing operations 

£million 

Sales to external customers 

Segment operating profit before exceptional items 
Exceptional items 

Operating profit 
Net finance costs 

Profit before taxation 

£million 

Sales to external customers 

Segment operating profit before exceptional items 
Exceptional items 

Operating profit 
Net finance costs 

Profit before taxation 

There are no significant sales between segments.  

Sensing and 
Control 

Components 

Integrated 
Manufacturing 
Services 

285.2 

17.3 

100.4  

4.1  

146.6 

8.8 

Sensing and 
Control 

259.6 

16.6 

Components 

109.6  

5.9  

Integrated 
Manufacturing 
Services 

107.7 

6.2 

2013 

Total 

532.2 

30.2 
(11.2)

19.0 
(0.7)

18.3 

2012 
(re-presented) 

Total 

476.9 

28.7 
(3.3)

25.4 
(3.4)

22.0 

91

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

Liabilities 

2012 
(re-presented) 

60.1 
19.6 
38.2 

117.9 
36.8 
26.7 

181.4 

Depreciation 
and 
amortisation 

2012 
(re-presented) 

14.8 
4.0 
1.6 

20.4 
0.5 

20.9 

2012 

78.3 
234.6 
95.4 
3.2 
62.0 
3.4 

476.9 

3 Segmental reporting (continued) 

b) Segment assets and liabilities 

£million 

Sensing and Control 
Components 
Integrated Manufacturing Services 

Segment assets and liabilities 
Pensions and other post-employment benefits 
Unallocated assets and liabilities 

Total assets/liabilities 

£million 

Sensing and Control 
Components 
Integrated Manufacturing Services 

Total continuing operations 
Discontinued operations 

Total 

Assets 

2012 
(re-presented) 

188.2  
55.0  
56.9  

300.1  
– 
72.4  

372.5  

Capital 
expenditure 

2012  
(re-presented) 

18.4  
4.8  
1.2  

24.4  
0.4  

24.8  

2013 

194.7 
51.7 
78.4 

324.8 
– 
62.8 

387.6 

2013 

21.7 
4.5 
3.5 

29.7 
– 

29.7 

2013 

58.5 
15.4 
47.2 

121.1 
20.5 
42.7 

184.3 

2013 

15.3 
3.9 
2.0 

21.2 
– 

21.2 

c) Geographic information 
Revenue by destination 
The Group operates on a global basis. Revenue from external customers by geographical destination is shown below. Management monitor 
and review revenue by region rather than by individual country given the significant number of countries where customers are based. 

£million 

United Kingdom 
Rest of Europe 
North America 
Central and South America 
Asia 
Rest of the World 

Total continuing operations 

2013 

104.1 
260.1 
94.4 
3.9 
68.8 
0.9 

532.2 

No individual customer directly accounts for more than 10% of Group revenue. Revenue from services is less than 5% of Group revenues. All other 
revenue is from the sale of goods. 

92

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
  
  
  
  
 
3 Segmental reporting (continued) 
Non-current assets 
The carrying amount of non-current assets, excluding deferred tax assets and financial assets, analysed by the geographical area in which the assets 
are located is shown below: 

£million 

United Kingdom 
Rest of Europe 
North America 
Central and South America 
Asia 

2013 

27.8 
57.2 
69.5 
4.3 
11.8 

2012 

25.0 
53.4 
71.7 
3.9 
10.3 

170.6 

164.3 

4 Acquisitions 
On 1 February 2013, the Group completed the acquisition of the 49% minority interest in Padmini TT Electronics Private Limited for a consideration 
of £8.3 million cash. A further £0.5 million consideration has been deferred until 2014, subject to performance conditions. 

During the year ended 31 December 2012 the Group acquired the majority of the UK business and assets of ACW Technology Limited for a 
consideration of £3.0 million in cash, with £0.1 million of consideration being deferred until 2013. The deferred consideration of £0.1 million was paid 
in the year ended 31 December 2013. 

5 Discontinued operations 
On 31 July 2012 the Group disposed of Dale Power Solutions Limited for total consideration of £10.6 million in cash before costs. 

On 7 December 2012 the Group disposed of Ottomotores SA de CV and Ottomotores Do Brasil Energia Ltda for a total consideration of $46.5 million 
(£29.0 million) in cash before costs. During 2013 the completion balance sheet, including net debt, was agreed with the buyer and £4.1 million was 
settled by TT Electronics plc. As a result, £0.8 million additional cost has been included within discontinued items at the year to 31 December 2013. 

The results from discontinued operations shown in the consolidated income statement are as follows:  

£million 

Revenue 
Cost of sales 

Gross profit 
Distribution costs 
Administrative expenses 

Operating profit before exceptional items 
Exceptional items 
Net finance costs 
(Loss)/profit on disposal of discontinued operations 

(Loss)/profit before taxation 
Taxation 

(Loss)/profit from discontinued operations 

The profit on disposal of discontinued operations is analysed below: 

£million 

Gross cash received 
Less: legal and professional costs 
Less: overdrafts/(cash) disposed of at completion 
Net proceeds per consolidated cash flow statement 
Less: net assets at completion 
Add: foreign exchange gain on disposals 

2013 

– 
– 

– 
– 
– 

– 
– 
– 
(0.8)

(0.8)
– 

(0.8)

2013 

– 
(0.8)
– 
(0.8)
– 
– 

(0.8)

2012 

68.8 
(56.7)

12.1 
(4.4)
(4.6)

3.1 
(0.6)
(0.4)
6.8 

8.9 
(2.6)

6.3 

2012 

39.6 
(2.3)
6.6 
43.9 
(37.3)
0.2 

6.8 

93

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
  
  
 
 
  
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

5 Discontinued operations (continued) 
The net cash flows from discontinued operations included within the consolidated cash flow statement are shown below:  

£million 

Operating activities 
Investing activities 
Financing activities 

Net cash flow 

6 Finance income and finance costs 

£million 

Interest expense 
Foreign exchange losses 
Net interest on employee obligations 
Amortisation of arrangement fees 
Unwinding of discount factor on minority put option 

Finance costs 
Interest income 
Foreign exchange gains 

Finance income 

Net finance costs 

7 Profit for the year 
Profit from continuing operations for the year is stated after charging/(crediting): 

£million 

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 
Amortisation of intangible assets 
Net foreign exchange gains 
Cost of inventories recognised as an expense* 
Staff costs (see note 12) 
Remuneration of Group Auditors 
– audit of these financial statements 
– audit of financial statements of subsidiaries of the Company   
– taxation compliance services    
– other tax advisory services 
Government grants credited 
Share-based payments 

Other operating income includes £nil (2012: £0.1 million) of profit on the disposal of property, plant and equipment. 

*Including exceptional items  

2013 

– 
– 
– 

– 

2012 

(8.1)
(0.9)
(0.2)

(9.2)

2012 
(re-presented) 

2013 

0.8 
1.0 
1.5 
0.2 
– 

3.5 

0.1 
2.7 

2.8 

0.7 

2013 

16.8 
4.4 
(2.2)
417.2 
152.3 

0.2 
0.6 
0.2 
0.1 
(0.6)
1.1 

1.6 
1.6 
1.2 
0.8 
0.7 

5.9 
0.6 
1.9 

2.5 

3.4 

2012 

15.8 
4.6 
(0.1)
378.9 
143.1 

0.2 
0.6 
0.2 
0.1 
(0.8)
1.2 

94

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
 
 
 
 
8 Exceptional items 
£million 

Continuing operations 
S&C Operational Improvement Plan 
Other restructuring costs  
Costs relating to closure of Boone, North Carolina plant 
Negative goodwill on acquisition 
M&A costs (including aborted deals) 
Total 

2013 

2012 

(3.1)
(5.9)
(1.2)
0.4 
(1.4)

(11.2)

– 
(1.1)
(2.1)
0.3 
(0.4)

(3.3)

For the year ended 31 December 2013, the exceptional items relate to: 

  S&C Operational Improvement Plan relates to a fundamental reorganisation of the manufacturing and sales footprint of the Sensing and 

Control division announced in June 2013. The charges in the year relate to: 

  the closure of the facility at Fullerton, USA and transfer of production to Mexico of £0.3 million; 

  the closure of sales offices in France, Italy and Japan of £2.3 million; and 

  consultancy costs of £0.5 million. 

  Other restructuring costs of £5.9 million comprise of the following: 

  the closure of the loss-making connectors business in the USA at a cost of £2.0 million; 

  the closure and relocation of the ACW Technology facilities from Southampton to Tonypandy in Wales for £1.1 million; 

  the transfer of production lines from Germany and Austria, and start-up costs in Romania of £1.3 million; 

  the relocation of production facilities in Malaysia of £0.5 million by IMS; 

  costs arising from the creation of the new organisation structure of £0.6 million; and 

  costs incurred in securing certain supply chain activities of £0.4 million. 

  The additional costs relating to the Boone property in North Carolina mainly comprise environmental clean-up costs;  

  Negative goodwill arising on the release of a surplus Fair Value inventory provision created at the date of the acquisition of ACW Technology of 

£0.4 million; and 

  M&A costs arising from the acquisition of ACW in December 2012 and other costs for potential acquisitions and disposals.   

For the year ended 31 December 2012, the exceptional items relate to: 

  Other restructuring costs of £1.1 million associated with: 

  the transfer of certain production lines from the Sensors division facilities to Romania of £0.2 million; 

  redundancy costs of £0.4 million; and 

  costs associated with the post-acquisition restructuring of ACW Technology Limited of £0.5 million. 

  The closure of the Components operation in Boone, North Carolina of £2.1 million; 
  Negative goodwill arising on the acquisition of the trade and assets of ACW Technology Limited of £0.3 million; and 

  £0.4 million of acquisition-related legal and professional fees. 

The Group reports non-trading income or expenditure as exceptional when the size, nature or function of an item or aggregation of similar items 
is such that separate presentation is relevant to an understanding of its financial position. 

95

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

9 Taxation 

a) Analysis of the tax charge for the year 

£million 

Current tax  
Current income tax charge 
Adjustments in respect of current income tax of previous year 
Total current tax charge 

Deferred tax 
Relating to origination and reversal of temporary differences 

Total tax charge in the income statement – continuing operations 

2012 
(re-presented) 

2013 

4.3 
(1.6)

2.7 

1.8 

4.5 

6.7 
0.4 

7.1 

(1.2)

5.9 

UK tax is calculated at 23.3% (2012: 24.5%) of taxable profits. Overseas tax is calculated at the tax rates prevailing in the relevant countries. 
The Group’s effective tax rate for the year from continuing operations was 24.6% (24.1% excluding exceptional items).  

Included within the total tax charge above is a £2.6 million credit relating to exceptional items (2012: £0.8 million). 

b) Reconciliation of the total tax charge for the year 

£million 

Profit before tax from continuing operations 

Profit before tax multiplied by the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 23.3% (2012: 24.5%) 
Effects of: 
Overseas tax rate differences 
Items not deductible for tax purposes or income not taxable 
Adjustment to current tax in respect of prior periods 
Impact on deferred tax arising from changes in tax rates 
Recognition and utilisation of tax losses and other items not previously recognised 
Current year tax losses and other items not recognised 
Adjustment to value of deferred tax assets 

Total tax charge reported in the income statement – continuing operations 

2012 
(re-presented) 

22.0 

5.4 

0.7 
1.8 
0.4 
– 
(2.9)
0.5 
– 

5.9 

2013 

18.3 

4.3 

0.4 
1.5 
(1.6)
(0.4)
(1.0)
0.5 
0.8 

4.5 

The UK corporation tax rate will reduce to 21% with effect from 1 April 2014 and 20% with effect from 1 April 2015. These rate reductions were 
substantively enacted in July 2013. Closing deferred tax assets in the UK have been calculated at the latter rate. The resulting charge has been 
recognised partly in the income statement (£0.2 million) and partly in the statement of comprehensive income (£0.7 million). 

In December 2013, changes were enacted in Mexico which increased the tax rate applicable to certain subsidiaries from 17.5% to 30%. The 
calculation of the deferred tax assets at the higher rate resulted in a credit to the income statement of £0.6 million. 

96

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
 
 
 
10 Dividends 

Final dividend for prior year 
Interim dividend for current year 

2013 
pence per 
share 

2013 
£million 

2012 
pence per 
share 

3.5 
1.6 

5.1 

5.5  
2.5  

8.0  

3.2 
1.5 

4.7 

2012 
£million 

5.0 
2.3 

7.3 

The Directors recommend a final dividend of 3.8p which when combined with the interim dividend of 1.6p gives a total dividend for the year of 5.4p 
per share. The Group’s dividend policy is to increase dividends progressively whilst maintaining cover of at least two times underlying earnings per 
share. The final dividend will be paid on 5 June 2014 to shareholders on the register on 23 May 2014. 

11 Earnings per share 
Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit attributable to owners of the Company by the weighted average number of shares in issue 
during the period.  

Headline earnings per share is based on profit for the year from continuing operations before exceptional items and their associated tax effect. 

Pence 

Basic earnings per share 
Continuing operations 
Discontinued operations 

Total 

Pence 

Diluted earnings per share 
Continuing operations 
Discontinued operations 

Total 

The numbers used in calculating headline, basic and diluted earnings per share are shown below. 

Headline earnings per share 

£million 

Continuing operations 
Profit for the period attributable to owners of the Company 
Exceptional items 
Tax effect of exceptional items (see note 9a) 
Headline earnings 

Headline earnings per share (pence) 

The weighted average number of shares in issue is as follows:  

Million 

Basic 
Adjustment for share awards 

Diluted 

2012 
(re-presented) 

2013 

8.8 
(0.5)

8.3 

10.3 
4.0 

14.3 

2012 
(re-presented) 

2013 

8.7 
(0.5)

8.2 

10.3 
4.0 

14.3 

2012 
(re-presented) 

2013 

13.8 
11.2 
(2.6)

22.4 

14.2 

2013 

157.6 
0.3 

157.9 

16.1 
3.3 
(0.8)

18.6 

11.9 

2012 

156.1 
0.8 

156.9 

97

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

12 Employee information 
The average number of full time equivalent employees (including Directors) during the year from continuing operations was: 

Number 

By function 
Production 
Sales and distribution 
Administration 

By division 
Sensing and Control 
Components 
Integrated Manufacturing Services 

Total continuing operations  

The aggregate emoluments including those of Directors for the year were:  

£million 

Wages and salaries 
Social security charges 
Employers’ pension costs 

Remuneration in respect of the Directors was as follows: 

£million 

Emoluments 

2012 
(re-presented) 

2013 

4,971 
344 
359 

5,674 

2,503 
1,615 
1,556 

5,674 

2013 

121.5 
28.7 
2.1 

152.3 

4,757 
364 
343 

5,464 

2,473 
1,728 
1,263 

5,464 

2012 

113.4 
27.8 
1.9 

143.1 

2013 

1.6 

2012 

1.5 

Further details of individual Directors’ remuneration, pension benefits and share awards are shown in the Annual report on remuneration on 
pages 66 to 72. 

Key management personnel 
The remuneration of key management during the year was as follows:  

£million 

Short-term benefits 
Termination payments 
Post-employment benefits 
Share-based payments 

2013 

2012 

4.1 
0.3 
0.2 
0.6 

5.2 

3.4 
0.1 
0.2 
0.8 

4.5 

In accordance with IAS 24 “Related party disclosures”, key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility for planning, 
directing and controlling the activities of the Group, directly or indirectly. Key management personnel comprise the Directors, Company Secretary, 
Divisional Chief Executives and other members of the Operating Board. Their compensation is considered and recommended to the Board by the 
Remuneration Committee.  

98

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
13 Property, plant and equipment 

£million 

Cost 
At 1 January 2012 
Additions 
Businesses acquired 
Disposals 
Disposal of subsidiaries 
Net exchange adjustment 

At 1 January 2013 
Additions 
Disposals 
Net exchange adjustment 

At 31 December 2013 

Depreciation and impairment 
At 1 January 2012 
Depreciation charge 
Impairment 
Disposals 
Disposal of subsidiaries 
Net exchange adjustment 

At 1 January 2013 
Depreciation charge 
Impairment 
Disposals 
Net exchange adjustment 

At 31 December 2013 

Net book value 
At 31 December 2013 
At 31 December 2012 

Land and 
buildings 

Plant and 
equipment 

61.5  
1.6  
–  
(3.2) 
(4.3) 
(1.3) 

54.3  
1.2  
(1.1) 
0.2  

298.4 
17.1 
0.3 
(20.5)
(5.3)
(7.0)

283.0 
19.1 
(19.1)
(0.4)

Total 

359.9 
18.7 
0.3 
(23.7)
(9.6)
(8.3)

337.3 
20.3 
(20.2)
(0.2)

54.6  

282.6 

337.2 

21.7  
1.7  
0.6  
(3.2) 
(1.1) 
(0.4) 

19.3  
1.7  
–  
(1.0) 
0.1  

247.3 
14.6 
– 
(20.3)
(3.8)
(5.7)

232.1 
15.1 
0.3 
(18.6)
(0.4)

269.0 
16.3 
0.6 
(23.5)
(4.9)
(6.1)

251.4 
16.8 
0.3 
(19.6)
(0.3)

20.1  

228.5 

248.6 

34.5  
35.0  

54.1 
50.9 

88.6 
85.9 

Included within land and buildings are three (2012: three) investment properties with a carrying value of £1.2 million (2012: £1.3 million). The fair 
value of these properties is £4.5 million (2012: £6.2 million). 

The depreciation charge for the year allocated to continuing operations is £16.8 million (2012: £15.8 million) and discontinued operations £nil (2012: 
£0.5 million). The impairment charge for the year allocated to continuing operations is £0.3 million (2012: £nil) and discontinued operations £nil 
(2012: £0.6 million). 

99

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
  
  
  
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

14 Goodwill 

Cost 
At 1 January 2012 
Net exchange adjustment 

At 1 January 2013 
Net exchange adjustment 

At 31 December 2013 

Following the reorganisation of the Group in 2013 goodwill is attributed to the following cash-generating units in the divisions shown below: 

Sensing and Control: 
Variable Components 
Optoelectronics 

Components: 
Power and Hybrids 
Resistors 

Integrated Manufacturing Services: 
TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services, USA 
TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services Suzhou 
New Chapel Electronics, UK 

Other 

At 31 December 2012 and under the previous organisational structure the goodwill was allocated as follows: 

Components: 
Bl Technologies, USA 
Optek Technology, USA  
New Chapel Electronics, UK 
Semelab, UK 

Integrated Manufacturing Services: 
TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services, USA 
TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services, Suzhou 

Other 

£million 

67.3 
(2.1)

65.2 
(1.3)

63.9 

£million 

23.1 
17.3 

4.9 
1.8 

7.6 
5.1 
3.4 

0.7 

£million 

28.1 
17.7 
3.4 
2.3 

7.8 
5.2 

0.7 

The Group tests goodwill impairment for each cash-generating unit (“CGU”) annually or more frequently if there are indications that goodwill 
might be impaired. The recoverable amounts of the CGUs are determined from value in use calculations. The key assumptions for the value in use 
calculations are those regarding the discount rates, growth rates and operating cash projections during the period for which management have 
detailed plans. Management estimate discount rates using pre-tax rates that reflect current market assessments of the Group’s time value of money 
and the risks specific to the CGU being measured. 

As part of the annual budgeting and strategic review processes, the Group prepares cash flow forecasts for the following three years. The growth rate 
assumed after this three-year period for a further 10 years is based on long-term GDP projections of the primary market for the CGU and a 
conservative 1% growth rate thereafter in perpetuity. The long-term GDP projections used are based on GDP growth of 2.5% for the UK businesses 
and 3.0% for the US and Chinese businesses (2012: 2.5% for the UK businesses and 3.0% for the US and Chinese businesses). The growth rates 
assume that demand for our products remains broadly in line with the underlying economic environment in the long-term future. Taking into account 
our expectation of future market conditions, we believe that the evolution of selling prices and cost measures put into place will lead to a sustained 
improvement in profitability which is higher than in recent years. 

100

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
  
 
  
 
  
14 Goodwill (continued) 
The discount rates used to discount the forecast cash flows are: 

UK businesses 
US businesses 
Chinese business 

2013 

8.1% 
9.5% 
11.5% 

2012 

7.6% 
10.0% 
11.5% 

 Following detailed review, no impairment losses have been recognised in the current or prior year. 

The goodwill allocated to each of Variable Components, Optoelectronics, Power and Hybrids, TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services, USA, 
TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services, Suzhou, and New Chapel Electronics are considered to be individually significant. After translation 
using year-end foreign exchange rates, these CGUs represent 96% or £61.4 million of the total goodwill balance. 

The recoverable amounts exceed the total carrying value of assets for the CGUs by the following amounts: 

£million 

Variable Components 
Optoelectronics 
Power and Hybrids 
TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services, USA 
TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services, Suzhou 
New Chapel Electronics, UK 

2013 

16.4 
32.4 
22.7 
14.5 
34.2 
1.7 

The recoverable amounts associated with these goodwill balances have been determined on a value in use basis using conservative assumptions. A 
value in use test requires comparison of asset carrying values with pre-tax cash flows (which exclude any tax benefit).  

A key assumption in the value in use test is the projected performance of the cash-generating units based on cash flow forecasts. The recoverable 
amounts associated with the goodwill balances are based on these performance projections, and based on current forecast information do not 
indicate that any goodwill balance is impaired. If a company’s actual performance does not meet these projections this could lead to an impairment 
of the goodwill in future periods. 

Other key assumptions and sensitivities are as follows: 

Long-term growth rate 
The budget and strategic review for these companies have been extrapolated in perpetuity using a long-term growth rate of 1.0% and discounted 
using the relevant entity discount rate. A key assumption in deriving the growth rate is that the businesses will grow in line with the underlying 
economic environment for the foreseeable future. Revenue growth would need to decrease annually by the following amounts for the carrying values 
to be impaired:  

Variable Components 
Optoelectronics 
Power and Hybrids 
TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services, USA 
TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services, Suzhou 
New Chapel Electronics, UK 

2013 

7.0% 
37.2% 
14.0% 
11.6% 
28.8% 
3.5% 

101

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

14 Goodwill (continued) 

Discount rate 
Sensitivity analysis has determined that the discount rate is an influential assumption on the outcome of the recoverable amount calculation. For the 
carrying values to be impaired, the discount rate would need to increase to the following amounts: 

Variable Components 
Optoelectronics 
Power and Hybrids 
TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services, USA 
TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services, Suzhou 
New Chapel Electronics, UK 

2013 

13.5% 
25.9% 
16.1% 
16.3% 
27.3% 
9.8% 

Cash flows 
Sensitivity analysis has also been performed on the operating cash flow projections. Cash flows can be impacted by changes to sales projections, sales 
prices, direct costs and replacement capital expenditure. In order for the carrying values to be impaired the expected cash flows for every year would 
need to reduce by the following: 

Variable Components 
Optoelectronics 
Power and Hybrids 
TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services, USA 
TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services, Suzhou 
New Chapel Electronics, UK 

2013 

34% 
62% 
55% 
46% 
62% 
21% 

The Directors have not identified any other likely changes in other significant assumptions that would cause the carrying value of recognised goodwill 
to exceed its recoverable amount. 

102

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
  
  
 
  
  
15 Other intangible assets 

£million 

Cost 
At 1 January 2012 
Additions 
Net exchange adjustment 

At 1 January 2013 
Additions 
Net exchange adjustment 

At 31 December 2013 

Amortisation 
At 1 January 2012 
Charge for the year 
Impairment 
Net exchange adjustment 

At 1 January 2013 
Charge for the year 
Impairment 

At 31 December 2013 

Net book value 

At 31 December 2013 
At 31 December 2012 

Product 
development 
costs 

Patents, 
 licences 
and 
other   

Customer 
relationships 

17.5 
4.8 
(0.4)

21.9 
5.2 
0.1 

27.2 

9.5 
3.6 
0.1 
(0.3)

12.9 
3.1 
0.1 

16.1 

11.1 
9.0 

5.6  
1.3  
–   

6.9  
4.2  
(0.1) 

11.0  

3.0  
0.7  
– 
– 

3.7  
1.0  
– 

4.7  

6.3  
3.2  

3.5 
– 
– 

3.5 
– 
– 

3.5 

2.3 
0.3 
– 
(0.1)

2.5 
0.3 
– 

2.8 

0.7 
1.0 

 Included within patents, licenses and other are intangible assets under construction with a carrying value of £2.2 million (2012: £2.2 million). 

16 Inventories 
£million 

Raw materials 
Work in progress 
Finished goods 

Inventories are stated after deduction of a provision for slow moving and obsolete items of £28.9 million (2012: £25.8 million).  

17 Trade and other receivables 
£million 

Trade receivables 
Prepayments 
Other receivables 

Trade receivables include £2.5 million of receivables due after more than one year. 

Provisions for impairment in respect of trade receivables are shown in note 21(d)(ii). 

2013 

36.8 
21.3 
21.9 

80.0 

2013 

58.2 
8.2 
8.0 

74.4 

Total 

26.6 
6.1 
(0.4)

32.3 
9.4 
–  

41.7 

14.8 
4.6 
0.1 
(0.4)

19.1 
4.4 
0.1 

23.6 

18.1 
13.2 

2012 

31.4 
19.0 
17.8 

68.2 

2012 

50.5 
9.7 
7.4 

67.6 

103

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

18 Trade and other payables  

£million 

Current liabilities 
Trade payables 
Taxation and social security 
Other payables, accruals and deferred income 
Financial liability to settle minority interest 

£million 

Non-current liabilities 
Accruals and deferred income 
Financial liability to settle minority interest 

19 Provisions 

£million 

At 1 January 2012 
Utilised 
Arising during the year 

At 1 January 2013 
Utilised 
Arising during the year 

At 31 December 2013 

2013 

2012 

62.3 
2.7 
39.3 
0.5 

104.8 

50.4 
3.1 
38.2 
8.2 

99.9 

2013 

2012 

6.1 
–  

6.1 

6.2 
0.5 

6.7 

Operational 
Improvement 

Plan  Reorganisation  
1.7  
(0.9) 
0.4  

–  
–  
–  

–  
(0.4)
3.1 

2.7 

1.2  
(1.7) 
2.6  

2.1  

Legal and 
other  
4.9 
(0.1)
4.7 

9.5 
(3.3)
(0.8)

5.4 

Total  
6.6 
(1.0)
5.1 

10.7 
(5.4)
4.9 

10.2 

The Operational Improvement Plan provision relates to fundamental restructuring of the manufacturing footprint and sales organisation of the 
Sensing and Control division. The balance as at 31 December 2013 includes the Directors’ best estimate of costs to complete the movement of 
production at the Fullerton facilities in California to Mexicali and closure of sales offices in France, Italy and Japan. 

The Reorganisation provision primarily relates to the restructuring programme associated with the closure of the Boone, North Carolina operations, 
the post-acquisition restructuring of the ACW Technology Limited business and costs associated with the closure of AB Interconnect.  

Legal and other claims represent the best estimate for the cost of settling outstanding product and other claims, and warranty provisions issued on the 
disposal of businesses. The Group has, on occasion, been required to enforce commercial contracts and similarly to defend itself against proceedings 
brought by other parties. Provisions are made for the expected costs associated with such matters, based on past experience of similar items and 
other known factors, taking into account professional advice received, and represent management’s best estimate of the likely outcome. The timing 
of utilisation of these provisions is frequently uncertain, reflecting the complexity of issues and the outcome of various court proceedings and 
negotiations. Contractual and other provisions represent the Directors’ best estimate of the cost of settling future obligations although there is a 
higher degree of judgement involved. Unless specific evidence exists to the contrary, these provisions are shown as current.  

No provision is made for proceedings which have been or might be brought by other parties against Group companies unless management, taking 
into account professional advice received, assesses that it is more likely than not that such proceedings may be successful. Contingent liabilities 
associated with such proceedings have been identified, but the Directors are of the opinion that any associated claims that might be brought can be 
resisted successfully, and therefore the possibility of any material outflow in settlement in excess of amounts provided is assessed as remote. 

The total provisions are analysed between current and non-current as follows:  

£million 

Non-current 
Current 

2013 

0.2 
10.0 

10.2 

2012 

0.2 
10.5 

10.7 

The timing of the utilisation of these amounts is uncertain as they are subject to commercial negotiation and legal process in different jurisdictions. 

104

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
20 Borrowings 

£million  

31 December 2013 
£45 million multi-currency revolving credit facility 
$30 million USD bilateral revolving credit facility 
$10 million USD bilateral revolving credit facility 
AB Mikroelektronik GmbH loan 
Overdrafts 
Finance leases 
Loan arrangement fee 

Total 
31 December 2012 
£45 million multi-currency revolving credit facility 
$30 million USD bilateral revolving credit facility 
$10 million USD bilateral revolving credit facility 
AB Mikroelektronik GmbH loan 
Finance leases 
Loan arrangement fee 

Total 

Maturity 

Currency of 
denomination 

Current 

Non-current 

Total 

2017 
2017 
2017 
2015 

2017 
2017 
2017 
2015 

GBP 
USD 
USD 
Euro 

GBP 
USD 
USD 
Euro 

– 
– 
– 
4.0  
–   
0.1  
(0.2) 

3.9  

– 
– 
– 
3.9  
0.1  
(0.2) 

3.8  

1.0 
18.1 
4.2 
0.8 
–  
0.1 
(0.5)

23.7 

1.0 
6.8 
0.6 
0.7 
0.1 
(0.6)

8.6 

1.0 
18.1 
4.2 
4.8 
–  
0.2 
(0.7)

27.6 

1.0 
6.8 
0.6 
4.6 
0.2 
(0.8)

12.4 

 In August 2012, the Group agreed a new five-year committed revolving credit facility of £70 million and a further incremental accordion facility 
of £42 million with a club of four banks comprising HSBC, The Royal Bank of Scotland, Santander UK and Barclays Bank, as well as two separate bi-
lateral agreements with Fifth Third Bank and Comerica Bank, both within the USA. At 31 December 2013 £23.3 million of the revolving credit facility 
was drawn down and the accordion facility was undrawn. Arrangement fees with a gross cost before amortisation of £0.9 million, and amortised cost 
of £0.6 million, have been netted off against these borrowings.  

The interest margin payable on the facility is based on the Group’s compliance with financial covenants (net debt/EBITDA before exceptional items) 
and is payable on a floating basis above £LIBOR or $LIBOR depending on the currency of denomination of the loan.  

The loan in AB Mikroelektronik GmbH is an export facility loan and used for working capital purposes within that business. 

Undrawn facilities 

At 31 December 2013, the total borrowing facilities available to the Group amounted to £143.3 million (2012: £145.7 million). At 31 December 2013, 
the Group had available £45.9 million (2012: £61.6 million) of undrawn committed borrowing facilities and £69.3 million (2012: £71.1 million) of 
undrawn uncommitted borrowing facilities, representing overdraft lines and the accordion facility. 

105

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

21 Financial risk management  
The financial information disclosed in the tables relating to the year ended 31 December 2013 represents continuing operations only. 

The main risks arising from the Group’s financial instruments are foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, credit risk, liquidity risk and commodity price 
risk. These risks arise from exposures that occur in the normal course of business and are managed by the Group’s Treasury department in close 
co-operation with the Group’s business divisions and operating companies, under the oversight of a Tax and Treasury Committee which is chaired 
by the Group Finance Director. The responsibilities of the Group’s Treasury department include the monitoring of financial risks, management of cash 
resources, debt and capital structure management, approval of counterparties and relevant transaction limits, and oversight of all significant treasury 
activities undertaken by the Group. The Group Treasury department operates as a service centre to the business divisions of the Group and not as a 
profit centre. 

A Group Treasury policy has been approved by the Board of Directors and is periodically updated to reflect developments in the financial markets and 
the financial exposure facing the Group. The Group’s Treasury and internal audit departments monitor compliance with the Treasury Policy 
on a regular basis. 

The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise borrowings, cash and cash equivalents and derivatives used for risk management 
purposes. The Group’s borrowings, surplus liquidity and derivative financial instruments are monitored and managed centrally by the Group’s 
Treasury department.  

The Group’s accounting policies with regard to financial instruments are detailed in note 2(w). 

a) Derivatives, financial instruments and risk management 
The Group uses derivative financial instruments to manage certain exposures to fluctuations in exchange rates, interest rates and commodity prices. 
The Group does not hold any speculative financial instruments. 

The Group is exposed to transactional and translation foreign exchange risk. Transactional foreign exchange risk arises from sales or purchases 
by a Group company in a currency other than that company’s functional currency. Translational foreign exchange risk arises on the translation 
of profits earned in overseas currencies into GBP and the translation of net assets denominated in overseas currencies into GBP, the Group’s 
functional currency.  

To mitigate transactional foreign exchange risk, wherever possible, Group companies enter into transactions in their functional currencies with 
customers and suppliers. When this is not possible, then hedging strategies are undertaken through the use of forward currency contracts for up to one 
year ahead. 

The Group uses average rate forward currency hedges to mitigate translational foreign exchange risk taking into account the level of forecast profits 
in foreign currencies, natural hedges and the cost of taking out cover. During 2013, the Group took out average rate forward contracts hedging GBP 
against a portion of US dollar and euro forecast cash flows for 2013. In 2013, the Group generated a loss of £0.4 million on the hedges that matured 
in 2013. There were no average rate forward contracts outstanding at 31 December 2013. 

The Group’s interest rate management policy is to maintain a balance between fixed and floating rates of interest on borrowings and deposits, and 
to use interest rate derivatives when appropriate. Given the current low levels of interest rates no interest rate derivatives were outstanding at the year 
end. 

During 2013, the Group took out hedges against a portion of the commodity purchases for 2013. In 2013 the Group generated a loss of £0.1 million 
on the hedges that matured during 2013. 

The forward currency contracts and commodity hedges have been designated as cash flow hedges and the mark to market valuation of these 
derivatives at 31 December 2013 is taken to the hedging reserve within equity. At 31 December 2013, the Group had a net derivative financial asset 
of £0.8 million (2012: £0.2 million).  

106

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
21 Financial risk management (continued)  

b) Foreign exchange risk 
The Group’s exposure to foreign currency is shown below:  

£million   

31 December 2013 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 

31 December 2012 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 

GBP 

USD 

Euro 

Other 

Total 

0.4 
0.4 
– 
(2.6)

(1.8)

0.3 
0.2 
– 
(1.2)

(0.7)

6.6 
11.2 
(22.3)
(8.2)

(12.7)

5.3 
12.1 
(7.4)
(6.2)

3.8 

2.4  
1.6  
– 
(1.1) 

2.9  

1.8  
1.6  
– 
(0.5) 

2.9  

0.1 
0.9 
– 
(1.9) 
(0.9) 

– 
0.5 
– 
– 

0.5 

9.5 
14.1 
(22.3)
(13.8)

(12.5)

7.4 
14.4 
(7.4)
(7.9)

6.5 

A 10% strengthening of GBP against the following currencies at 31 December would have increased/(decreased) equity and profit after tax by the 
amounts shown below. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular interest rates, remain constant.  

£million 

US dollar 
Euro 

2013 

0.8 
(0.3)

2012 

0.2 
0.3 

A 10% weakening of GBP against the above currencies at 31 December would have had an equal but opposite effect on the above currencies to the 
amount shown above, on the basis that all other variables remain constant. 

c) Interest rate risk 

The Group has financial assets and liabilities which are exposed to changes in market interest rates. Changes in interest rates primarily impact 
borrowings by changing their future cash flows (floating rate debt) or their fair value (fixed rate debt) and deposits.  

The exposure of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities to interest rate risk is as follows:  

£million 

Financial assets 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Derivative financial instruments 
Total financial assets 

Financial liabilities 
Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 

Total financial liabilities 

At 31 December 2013, 3% (2012: 7%) of total debt was at a fixed rate and the balance was at floating rate.  

Floating 
rate 

Fixed 
rate 

– 
54.5 
– 

54.5 

(26.7)
– 

(26.7)

Non-
interest 
bearing 

64.9 
– 
0.8 

65.7 

2013 
total 

64.9 
54.5 
0.8 

120.2 

– 
– 
– 

– 

(0.9) 
– 

(0.9) 

– 
(110.7)

(110.7)

(27.6)
(110.7)

(138.3)

107

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
  
  
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

21 Financial risk management (continued)  

£million 

Financial assets 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Derivative financial instruments 

Total financial assets 

Financial liabilities 
Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 

Total financial liabilities 

Floating 
rate 

Fixed 
rate 

 Non-interest 
bearing 

2012 
total 

– 
59.1 
– 

59.1 

(11.5)
– 

(11.5)

– 
–   
– 

–   

57.3 
– 
0.2 

57.5 

(0.9) 
– 

(0.9) 

– 
(105.3)

(105.3)

57.3 
59.1 
0.2 

116.6 

(12.4)
(105.3)

(117.7)

The interest charged on floating rate financial liabilities is based on the relevant benchmark rate (such as LIBOR). Interest on financial instruments 
classified as fixed rate is fixed until the maturity of the instrument. 

Considering the net cash position of the Group at 31 December 2013, any increase in interest rates would result in a net gain in the consolidated 
income statement, and any decrease in interest rates would result in a net loss. The effect on profit after tax of a 1% movement in £LIBOR, based 
on the year end floating rate net cash and with all other variables held constant, is estimated to be £0.2 million (2012: £0.1 million). 

d) Credit risk 
Exposure to credit risk arises as a result of transactions in the Group’s ordinary course of business and is applicable to all financial assets. Investments in 
cash and cash equivalents and derivative financial instruments are with approved counterparty banks and other financial institutions. Counterparties 
are assessed prior to, during, and after the conclusion of transactions to ensure exposure to credit risk is limited to an acceptable level. The maximum 
exposure with respect to credit risk is represented by the carrying amount of each financial asset on the balance sheet. 

Credit risk relating to trade receivables  
The Group’s major exposure to credit risk is in respect of trade receivables. Given the number and geographical spread of the Group’s ultimate 
customers and the solvency of major trade debtors, credit risk is believed to be limited. The Group is not reliant on any particular customer in the 
markets in which it operates and there is no significant concentration of credit risk. The Group regularly monitors its exposure to bad debts in order 
to minimise this exposure. 

The Group has strict procedures in place to manage the credit risk on trade receivables. Customer credit risk is managed by each operating company 
within a division but is subject to Group oversight to ensure that each division’s customer credit risk management system operates in a prudent and 
responsible manner. Credit evaluations are performed for all customers and credit limits are established based on internal or external rating criteria. 
The credit quality of the Group’s significant customers is monitored on an ongoing basis, and receivables that are neither past due nor impaired are 
considered of good credit quality. Letters of credit or payments in advance are obtained where customer credit quality is not considered strong 
enough for open credit. 

Trade receivables are denominated in the currencies in which the Group trades. The Group’s policy is that receivables and payables not in the 
functional currency of the subsidiary concerned are covered by forward foreign currency exchange contracts. The exchange risk at Group level 
is therefore restricted to the risk on the translation of overseas assets, liabilities and cash flows into GBP which can be hedged using foreign 
exchange hedges.  

There were no material impairments of trade receivables as at 31 December 2013 or 2012. The solvency of the debtor and their ability to repay 
the receivables were considered in assessing the impairment of such assets. 

(i) Risk for trade receivables by geographical regions 
The maximum exposure to credit risk for trade receivables at 31 December by geographic areas was: 

£million 

Europe (including UK) 
North America 
Central and South America 
Asia 
Rest of the World 

108

2013 

38.2 
9.4 
0.2 
10.0 
0.4 

58.2 

2012 

34.1 
7.7 
0.3 
7.9 
0.5 

50.5 

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
21 Financial risk management (continued)  
(ii) Impairment losses 
The ageing of trade receivables at 31 December was: 

£million 

Not past due 
Past due 0 – 60 days 
Past due 61 – 120 days 
More than 120 days 

Gross 

48.9 
7.3 
2.5 
0.8 

59.5 

2013 
Impairment 

– 
(0.3) 
(0.3) 
(0.7) 

(1.3) 

The movement in the provision for impairment in respect of trade receivables during the year was as follows: 

£million 

At 1 January 
Credited to income statement 
Businesses disposed 

At 31 December 

Gross 

37.4 
11.9 
1.6 
1.0 

51.9 

2013 

1.4 
(0.1)
– 

1.3 

2012 
Impairment 

– 
(0.1)
(0.4)
(0.9)

(1.4)

2012 

2.3 
(0.5)
(0.4)

1.4 

(iii) Credit risk related to other financial assets and cash deposits 
Credit risk relating to the Group’s other financial assets, principally comprising cash and cash equivalents, other receivables and derivative financial 
instruments arises from the potential default of counterparties. Credit risk arising from balances with banks and financial institutions is monitored 
by the Group’s Treasury department. Investment of cash and deposits are made only with approved counterparties of high credit worthiness and 
are reviewed on a regular basis to take account of developments in financial markets. 

No material exposure is considered to exist by virtue of the possible non-performance of the counterparties to derivative financial instruments 
and other receivables. 

The carrying amount of financial assets represents the maximum credit exposure. The maximum exposure to credit risk at 31 December was: 

£million 

Other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Derivative financial instruments (current assets) 

2013 

6.7 
54.5 
0.8 

2012 

7.4 
59.1 
0.2 

e) Liquidity risk 
The Group maintains a balance between availability of funding and maximising investment return on cash balances through the use of short-term 
cash deposits, credit facilities and longer term debt instruments. Management regularly reviews the funding requirements of the Group. 

The Group’s policy is to centrally manage debt and surplus cash balances. 

At 31 December 2013, the Group had £45.9 million of undrawn committed borrowing facilities (2012: £61.6 million). 

Maturity of financial assets and liabilities 
The table below analyses the Group’s financial assets and liabilities, which will be settled on a gross basis, into relevant maturity groups based on the 
remaining period at the balance sheet date to the contractual maturity date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the contractual undiscounted 
cash flows. 

£million   

31 December 2013 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Derivative financial instruments 

Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 

On demand 

Less than 
3 months 

3 to 12 
months 

 1 to 5 
years 

Over 5 
years 

0.1 
53.9 
– 

54.0 

– 
– 
– 

59.3 
0.6 
– 

59.9 

(4.2)
(97.8)
(102.0)

3.0 
– 
0.8 

3.8 
(0.6) 
(8.9)
(9.5)

2.5  
– 
– 

2.5  

(26.1) 
(3.4) 
(29.5) 

– 
– 
– 

– 

– 
(0.6)
(0.6)

Total 

64.9 
54.5 
0.8 

120.2 

(30.9)
(110.7)
(141.6)

109

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

21 Financial risk management (continued) 
At 31 December 2013, the Group had derivative financial instruments hedging a notional contractual amount of £49.2 million of foreign exchange 
and commodity cash flows. Of this total amount, £49.2 million matures within one year. 

£million   

31 December 2012 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Derivative financial instruments 

Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 
Derivative financial instruments 

On demand 

Less than 
3 months 

3 to 12 
months 

 1 to 5 
years 

Over 5 
years 

– 
59.1 
– 

59.1 
– 
– 
– 

–  

54.3 
– 
– 

54.3 
(4.0)
(90.1)
– 

(94.1)

2.9 
– 
0.2 

3.1 
(0.2)
(10.1)
– 

(10.3)

0.1  
– 
– 

0.1  
(10.0) 
(3.0) 
– 

(13.0) 

– 
– 
– 

– 
– 
(2.1)
– 

(2.1)

Total 

57.3 
59.1 
0.2 

116.6 
(14.2)
(105.3)
– 

(119.5)

f) Fair value of financial assets and liabilities 
The Group has adopted IFRS 13 “Fair Value Measurement” which requires an analysis of those financial instruments that are measured at fair value 
at the end of the year in a fair value hierarchy. In addition IFRS 13 requires financial instruments not measured at fair value but for which fair value is 
disclosed to be analysed in the same fair value hierarchy: 

  Level 1 – quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities; 

  Level 2 – inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) 

or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices); and 

  Level 3 – inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (i.e. unobservable inputs). 
Set out below is a comparison by class of the carrying amounts and fair value of the Group’s financial instruments that are carried in the financial 
statements. 

Held at amortised cost 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade and other receivables 
Trade and other payables 
Borrowings 
Held at fair value 
Derivative financial instruments (Level 1 and 2) 
Held at depreciated cost 
Investment properties 

2013 

Carrying 
value 

Fair value 

Carrying 
value 

54.5 
64.9 
(110.7)
(27.6)

54.5  
64.9  
(110.7) 
(27.6) 

59.1 
57.3 
(105.3)
(12.4)

0.8 

1.2 

0.8  

4.5  

0.2 

1.3 

2012 

Fair value 

59.1 
57.3 
(105.3)
(12.4)

0.2 

6.2 

The fair value of the financial assets and liabilities are included at the amount at which the instrument could be exchanged in a current transaction 
between willing parties, other than in a forced or liquidation sale. The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate the fair values: 

  cash and cash equivalents, trade and other receivables, trade and other payables approximate to their carrying amounts largely due to the 

short-term maturities of these instruments; 

  the fair value of borrowings is estimated by discounting future cash flows using rates currently available for debt and remaining maturities. 

  the fair value of derivative financial instrument assets (£0.8 million) are estimated by discounting expected future cash flows using current 

market indices such as yield curves and forward exchange rates over the remaining term of the instrument (level 1 and level 2); and 

  the fair value of investment properties are based on market valuations obtained through third party valuations. 

110

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
21 Financial risk management (continued) 

g) Capital management 
The over-riding objectives of the Group’s capital management policy are to safeguard and support the business as a going concern through the 
business cycle and to maintain an optimal capital structure by reducing the Group’s overall cost of capital. The Board considers equity shareholders’ 
funds as capital. 

The Group maintains a balance between availability of funding and maximising investment return on cash balances through the use of short-term 
cash deposits, credit facilities and longer term debt instruments, and management regularly reviews the funding requirements of the Group. 

Dividends are paid when the Board consider it appropriate to do so, taking into account the availability of funding. The Group’s dividend policy 
is to increase dividends progressively whilst maintaining cover of at least two times underlying earnings per share. 

The Group is in a net cash position of £26.9 million (2012: £46.7 million). Included within the debt facilities are certain financial covenants related to 
net debt/EBITDA before exceptional items and EBITDA before exceptional items/net finance charges for which compliance certificates are produced 
on a 12 month rolling basis every half year. All financial covenants were fully complied with during the year and up to the date of approval of the 
financial statements. There are no covenants under negotiation at present. 

111

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

22 Deferred tax 
The amounts of deferred taxation assets/(liabilities) provided in the financial statements are as follows: 

£million 
Intangible assets 
Property, plant and equipment 
Deferred development costs 
Retirement benefit obligations 
Inventories 
Provisions 
Tax losses 
Unremitted overseas earnings 
Share-based payments 
Short-term timing differences 
Deferred tax asset/(liability) 

£million 
Intangible assets 
Property, plant and equipment 
Deferred development costs 
Retirement benefit obligations 
Inventories 
Provisions 
Tax losses 
Unremitted overseas earnings 
Share-based payments 
Short-term timing differences 

Deferred tax asset/(liability) 

As at 1 January 
2013 

Continuing 
operations 

Discontinued 
operations 

Recognised in 
equity/ OCI 

Net 
exchange 
translation 

Transfer to 
current tax 

As at 31 
December 
2013 

(4.3)
(1.4)
(2.8)
9.3 
2.0 
3.4 
4.0 
(0.9)
1.0 
0.4 

10.7 

(0.5)
(0.4)
(0.5)
(1.0)
0.5 
1.8 
(0.9)
–
(0.7)
0.1 

(1.6)

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–
(3.8)
–
–
–
–
(0.2)
–

(4.0)

– 
0.1  
– 
(0.1) 
– 
(0.1) 
(0.1) 
– 
– 
(0.1) 

(0.3) 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
(2.2) 
– 
– 
– 

(2.2) 

(4.8)
(1.7)
(3.3)
4.4 
2.5 
5.1 
0.8 
(0.9)
0.1 
0.4 

2.6 

As at 1 January 
2012 

Continuing 
operations 

Discontinued 
operations

Recognised in 
equity/ OCI

Net exchange 
translation 

Transfer to 
current tax 

As at 31 December 
2012

(4.2)
(1.6)
(2.3)
9.6 
2.7 
5.2 
2.1 
(1.2)
1.3 
0.1 

11.7 

(0.2)
0.4 
(0.3)
(0.1)
(1.0)
(0.8)
1.9 
0.3 
0.5 
0.5 

1.2 

–
–
–
–
0.5 
(1.1)
–
–
–
(0.2)

(0.8)

–
–
–
(0.4)
–
–
–
–
(0.8)
–

(1.2)

0.1  
(0.2) 
(0.2) 
0.2  
(0.2) 
0.1  
– 
– 
– 
– 

(0.2) 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 

2013 

7.3 
(4.7)

2.6 

(4.3)
(1.4)
(2.8)
9.3 
2.0 
3.4 
4.0 
(0.9)
1.0 
0.4 

10.7 

2012 

13.1 
(2.4)

10.7 

Certain deferred tax assets and liabilities have been offset. The following is the analysis of the deferred tax balances:  
£million 

Deferred tax assets 
Deferred tax liabilities 

Net deferred tax asset 

The Group has recognised deferred tax assets of £0.3 million in a number of entities which have incurred losses in 2012 or 2013. Such assets have 
been recognised due to the availability of suitable taxable profits in future periods to support their recovery. 

At 31 December 2013, the gross amount and expiry date of losses available for carry forward are as follows: 

£million 

Losses for which a deferred tax asset has been recognised 
Losses for which no deferred tax asset has been recognised 

Expiring within 
5 years 

Expiring 
within 6-10 
years 

0.1 
0.8 

0.9 

0.7  
0.7  

1.4  

Unlimited 

2.7  
29.6  

32.3  

Total 

3.5 
31.1 

34.6 

112

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
22 Deferred tax (continued) 

At 31 December 2012, the gross amount and expiry date of losses available for carry forward are as follows: 

£million 

Losses for which a deferred tax asset has been recognised 
Losses for which no deferred tax asset has been recognised 

Expiring within 5 
years

Expiring within 6-
10 years

–
2.4 

2.4 

– 
0.3  

0.3  

Unlimited

11.7 
25.2 

36.9 

Total

11.7 
27.9 

39.6 

Included within the £31.1 million (2012: £27.9 million) of unrecognised tax losses in the table above is £23.5 million (2012: £21.5 million) of tax losses 
within the Company. Since UK tax legislation does not allow the utilisation of brought forward tax losses of one UK entity against the current year tax 
profits of another UK entity, the use of these tax losses is limited. 

At 31 December 2013, the Group had other items for which no deferred tax assets have been recognised as follows: 

£million 

Other temporary differences 

2013 

14.2 

2012 

10.0 

At the balance sheet date the aggregate unrecognised deferred tax liability in respect of undistributed earnings of overseas subsidiaries is £0.7 
million (2012: £nil). This is in respect of undistributed earnings in overseas subsidiaries of £40.3 million (2012: £37.3 million). 

113

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

23 Retirement benefit schemes 

Defined contribution schemes  
The Group operates 401(k) plans in North America and defined contribution arrangements in the rest of the world. The assets of these schemes 
are held independently of the Group. The total contributions charged by the Group in respect of defined contribution schemes were £2.1 million 
(2012: £1.9 million). 

Defined benefit schemes  
During the year the Group operated one significant defined benefit scheme in the UK and two overseas defined benefit schemes in the USA and 
Japan. The Group’s main scheme is the UK plan which commenced in 1993 and increased in 2006 and 2007 through the merger of the UK former 
schemes. All of these schemes are closed to new members. The UK scheme was closed to future accrual in 2010 and the Japanese scheme was 
wound up in the year. 

The triennial valuation of the UK scheme as at April 2013 showed a deficit of £19.1 million compared with £39.4 million at April 2010. It was agreed 
with the Trustee that the existing recovery plan is sufficient to address the deficit; namely contributions of £4.1 million, £4.3 million and £4.5 million to 
be paid over the next three years. In addition, the Company has set aside £3.0 million over the last three years to be utilised in agreement with the 
Trustee for reducing the long-term liabilities of the scheme.  

An actuarial valuation of the USA defined benefit scheme was carried out by independent qualified actuaries in 2012 using the projected unit credit 
method. Pension scheme assets are stated at their market value at 31 December 2013. 

An analysis of the pension deficit by country is shown below:  

£million 

UK 
USA 
Japan 

2013 

19.8 
0.7 
–  

20.5 

2012 

33.7 
2.8 
0.3 

36.8 

The principal assumptions used for the purpose of the actuarial valuations for the Group’s primary defined benefit scheme, the UK scheme, 
were as follows: 

% 

Discount rate 
Inflation rate  
Increases to pensions in payment (LPI 5% pension increases) 
Increases to deferred pensions (CPI) 

2013 

2012 

4.6 
3.5 
3.4 
2.5 

4.4 
3.0 
3.0 
2.5 

The mortality tables applied by the actuaries at 31 December 2013 were S1NA tables adjusted by + one year, with a 1.25% long-term rate of 
improvement in conjunction with the CMI 2012 projections. The mortality tables applied by the actuaries at 31 December 2012 were S1NA tables 
adjusted by + one year, with future improvements increasing in line with medium cohort with a 1% per annum floor.  

A decrease in the discount rate by 0.1% per annum increases the liabilities by approximately £6.8 million. An increase by 0.1% per annum in the 
inflation rate increases the liabilities by approximately £4.6 million; by £3.0 million for pensions in payment and £2.0 million for deferred pensions. An 
increase in the life expectancy of 1 year increases the liabilities by approximately £11.8 million.  

The sensitivities above consider the impact of the single change shown, with the other assumptions assumed to be unchanged. The inflation 
sensitivities allow for the consequential impact on the relevant pension increase assumptions. The sensitivity analyses have been determined based 
on a method that extrapolates the impact on the defined benefit obligation as a result of reasonable changes in key assumptions occurring at the 
end of the reporting period. 

114

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
  
23 Retirement benefit schemes (continued) 
The amounts recognised in respect of the pension deficit in the Consolidated balance sheet are: 

£million 

Equities 
UK 

Overseas   

Quoted 
Unquoted 
Quoted 
Unquoted 

Government Bonds 
UK 

Fixed 
Index-linked 

Overseas 
Corporate Bonds 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Derivatives 
Other 
Fair value of assets 
Present value of funded obligation 

Net liability recognised in the Consolidated balance sheet 

2013 

2012 

2.1 
25.5 
29.9 
75.0 

15.0 
16.8 
21.9 
57.3 
69.4 
54.5 
26.7 

394.1 
(414.6)

(20.5)

1.9 
24.0 
29.6 
71.2 

27.8 
19.3 
21.5 
57.0 
39.5 
62.3 
33.4 
387.5 
(424.3)

(36.8)

The schemes’ assets do not include the Group’s financial instruments nor any property occupied by, or other assets used by the Group. Swaps are 
liability driven instruments taken out to hedge part of the scheme inflation and interest rate risks.  

Amounts recognised in the Consolidated income statement are: 

£million 

Scheme administration costs 
Net interest on employee obligations 
Settlements and curtailments 

2013 

1.3 
1.5 
(0.4) 

2012* 

0.7 
1.2 
– 

The actual return on schemes assets was a gain of £20.7 million (2012: £21.7 million). Actuarial gains and losses are remeasured and reported in the 
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income and, since transition to IFRS, amount to a net loss of £27.7 million.  

Changes in the present value of the defined benefit obligation are: 

£million 

Defined benefit obligation at 1 January 
Interest on obligation 
Settlements and curtailments 
Change in actuarial estimates and assumptions 
Benefits paid 

Defined benefit obligation at 31 December 

2013 

424.3 
18.2 
(0.4)
(8.9)
(18.6)

414.6 

2012* 

413.5 
19.0 
– 
8.5 
(16.7)

424.3 

115

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

23 Retirement benefit schemes (continued) 
Changes in the fair value of the schemes’ assets are: 

£million 

Fair value of schemes’ assets at 1 January 
Interest income on defined benefit scheme assets* 
Return on scheme assets, excluding interest income* 
Contributions by employer 
Benefits paid 

Fair value of schemes’ assets at 31 December 

* Re-presented for IAS 19 (revised). 

24 Share capital 
£million 

Issued and fully paid 
158,608,324 (2012: 156,950,664) Ordinary shares of 25p each 

2013 

387.5 
16.7 
4.0 
4.3 
(18.4)

394.1 

2012* 

378.0 
17.1 
4.2 
4.9 
(16.7)

387.5 

2013 

2012 

39.7 

39.2 

During 2013 the Company issued 867,400 Ordinary shares on the vesting of the Long Term Incentive Plan awards issued in 2010. The shares were 
then allocated to award holders via an Employee Benefit Trust for nil consideration. A charge of £0.2 million has been recognised in retained earnings 
accordingly. 

The Company also issued 790,260 Ordinary shares as a result of share options being exercised under the 1994 Approved Plan, 1996 Unapproved 
Plan (grants made in 2003), 2004 Approved Plan and Unapproved Plan, the Sharesave scheme and Share Purchase plans. The aggregate 
consideration received was £0.9 million, which resulted in an increase in share premium of £0.7 million. 

25 Share-based payment plans 
The Company has the following share-based payment plans in operation at 31 December 2013: 

  Share option schemes, which are closed for future grants; 

  Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) for senior executives; 

  Restricted Share Plan for certain senior executives; and 

  Sharesave plans for UK, German and Austrian employees; and Share Purchase plans for US employees. 

a) Share option schemes 
Details of the share options outstanding during the year are as follows:  

Number of share 
options 

Weighted average 
exercise price (p) 

Number of share 
options 

Weighted average 
exercise price (p) 

2013 

2012 

346,364 
(27,480)
(257,586)
(23,750)

37,548 

37,548 

100.5 
145.8 
91.0 
80.0 

145.0 

145.0 

579,568  
(60,056) 
(37,377) 
(135,771) 

346,364  

108,989  

115.9 
75.6 
145.0 
165.0 

100.5 

145.0 

At 1 January 
Forfeited 
Exercised 
Expired 
At 31 December 

Exercisable at 31 December 

116

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
  
  
 
25 Share-based payment plans (continued) 
At 31 December 2013 options were exercisable over 37,548 (2012: 346,364) Ordinary shares under the Group share option schemes up to May 
2014. The only remaining option has a subscription price of 145p and a remaining contractual life of 0.33 years (2012: 0.64 years). Options are equity 
settled, have a life of ten years and vest after three years. Exercise of the options is conditional on there being an increase in earnings per share over 
any consecutive three-year period above the increase in the Retail Price Index over the same period. 

Following the approval of the Long Term Incentive Plan 2005 at the Extraordinary General Meeting held on 20 October 2006, all existing share option 
schemes were closed for future grants.  

b) Long Term Incentive Plans 
Details of the LTIP awards outstanding during the year are as follows: 

At 1 January 
Granted 
Forfeited 
Vested 
At 31 December 

Exercisable at 31 December 

2013 

2012 

Number of share 
awards 

Number of share 
awards 

4,184,223  
1,294,107  
(408,562) 
(1,440,426) 

6,609,747 
1,154,691 
(607,544)
(2,972,671)

3,629,342  

4,184,223 

– 

– 

During 2012 and 2013 grants of awards were made under the LTIP for the issue of shares in 2015 and 2016 respectively. The award is a contingent 
right to receive shares in the future, subject to continued employment and the achievement of predetermined performance criteria. The performance 
targets attached to awards require the achievement of earnings per share (“EPS”) and total shareholder return (“TSR”) targets as detailed in the 
Annual report on remuneration on page 68.  

On 17 April, 3 September and 15 October 2013 grants of awards were made under the LTIP for the issue of up to 948,607 shares, 323,500 shares 
and 22,000 shares in 2016. On 25 April 2012 grants of awards were made under the LTIP for the issue of up to 1,154,691 shares in 2015.  

The fair value of the shares was estimated at the grant date using a Monte Carlo simulation model, taking into account the terms and conditions 
upon which the shares were granted. This model simulates the TSR and compares it against the group of comparator companies. It takes into 
account historic dividends and share price fluctuations to predict the distribution of relative share price performance. 

The following table lists the inputs to the model: 

Number of awards 
Fair value at grant date 
Share price at grant date 
Exercise price 
Expected volatility 
Expected weighted average life at 31 December (years) 

2013 

2012 

Shares with a 
3 September 2013 
grant date 

Shares with a 
17 April 2013 
grant date 

345,500  
144.3p 
190.0p 
£nil 
42% 
2.7  

948,607  
120.0p 
161.0p 
£nil 
42% 
2.3  

Shares with a 
25 April 2012 
grant date 

1,154,691 
144.0p 
182.5p 
£nil 
49% 
2.3 

The award of shares is not affected by the risk free rate of interest since no investment is required by the recipient, and therefore no interest could be 
earned elsewhere. Expected volatility is based on historic share price movements. 

On 3 September 2013, 37,500 (25 April 2012: 32,545) notional share awards were granted to senior executives which will ultimately be settled in 
cash. These awards are subject to the same vesting criteria as the 3 September 2013 (25 April 2012) LTIP grant.  

The LTIP grants made in 2010 vested during 2013 achieving 94.375% of the performance conditions. The weighted average exercise price was £nil. 

The Group gave its 2010 LTIP holders the option to receive shares net of the employee tax owed. The employee tax of £1.0 million has been paid to 
the tax authorities in cash.

117

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
  
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

25 Share-based payment plans (continued) 

c) Restricted Share Plan 
On 24 September 2010, the Group granted 259,515 shares under a restricted share plan to certain senior executives. The award vested over 131,314 
shares on 24 September 2013.  

On 31 October 2013, the Group granted 481,900 shares under a new restricted share plan to certain senior executives. The award is a contingent right 
to receive shares with 40% vesting on completion of a three-year period and the remaining 60% vesting six months later subject to continued 
employment with the Group and the achievement of predetermined performance criteria. The performance targets attached to the awards require 
the achievement of three equally weighted performance criteria: Revenue Growth Targets, Profit Margin Targets and Return on Capital Employed. 

Details of the restricted share plan awards outstanding during the year are as follows:  

At 1 January  
Granted 
Forfeited 
Exercised 
Expired 
At 31 December  

Exercisable at 31 December  

2013 

2012 

Number of share 
awards 

Number of share 
awards 

207,612  
481,900  
(76,298) 
(131,314) 
– 

481,900  

– 

259,515 
– 
(51,903)
– 
– 

207,612 
– 

The fair value of the shares at grant date 24 September 2010 was 139.0p. On 24 October 2010, the Company purchased 259,515 shares at a cost of 
£0.4 million through an Employee Benefit Trust. These shares are dilutive for the purpose of earnings per share. 

The fair value of the shares at grant date 31 October 2013 was 184.3p vesting 31 October 2016 and 181.9p vesting 30 April 2017. 

d) Sharesave schemes 
The Group operates Sharesave schemes for participating employees in the UK, Germany and Austria under a three-year plan (historically a five-year 
plan was offered which was discontinued during the year). Employees may purchase the Group’s shares at a 20% discount to the market price on the 
day prior to the commencement of the offer up to a maximum contribution value of £3,000 (UK) or €3,480 (Germany/Austria) in any one year. 
Monthly contributions are saved with LloydsTSB plc, via Equiniti Ltd, the Registrars, in the employee’s share savings plan and will only be released to 
employees who remain in the Group’s employment for a period of either three or five years from commencement of the savings contract. Options 
become exercisable on completion of either the three- or five-year term or within six months of leaving in certain circumstances. 

Date price set 
03 September 2010 
19 April 2011 
2 September 2011 
31 May 2012 
31 August 2012 
30 August 2013 

Market price 
142.5p 
169.0p 
162.0p 
162.0p 
148.0p 
186.0p 

Option price 
114.0p  
136.0p 
130.0p 
130.0p 
119.0p 
149.0p 

2013 

UK 

80.0  
n/a 

UK 

53.2  
61.0  

Options 
outstanding 
511,738 
113,773 
184,360 
56,660 
113,493 
348,481 

2012 

Germany/ 
Austria 

58.5 
67.2 

UK 
Germany/Austria 
UK 
Germany/Austria 
UK 
UK 

The fair value of the shares at grant date was as follows: 

pence 

3 year scheme 
5 year scheme 

118

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
25 Share-based payment plans (continued) 
Details of the Sharesave awards outstanding during the year are as follows:  

At 1 January  
Granted 
Forfeited 
Exercised 
At 31 December  
Exercisable at 31 December 

2013 

2012 

Number of 
share awards 

Number of 
share awards 

1,678,514 
348,481 
(227,536)
(470,954)
   1,328,505 
13,850 

1,725,512 
216,730 
(208,721)
(55,007)
1,678,514 
192,438 

The Group operates a Stock Purchase Plan for participating US employees, under the plan employees may purchase the Group’s shares at a 15% 
discount to the market price at the date of acquisition, up to a maximum of $6,500 per annum. Employees save on a monthly basis and shares are 
purchased each quarter. 

The total share-based payment charge for the year (excluding social security charges of £0.3 million (2012: £0.4 million)) arising from the above share 
scheme plans was £1.1 million (2012: £1.4 million).  

26 Hedging and translation reserves 

£million 

At 1 January 2012 
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations 
Tax on exchange differences 
Loss on hedge of net investment in foreign operations 
Cash flow hedges 
Foreign exchange gain on disposals taken to income statement 
At 1 January 2013 
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations 
Loss on hedge of net investment in foreign operations 
Cash flow hedges 

At 31 December 2013 

27 Retained earnings 
£million 

At 1 January 2012 
Profit for the year 
Fair value of minority put option 
Dividends paid by the Company 
New shares issued 
Remeasurement of defined benefit pension schemes (see note 23) 
Tax on remeasurement of pension deficit movement 
At 1 January 2013 
Profit for the year 
Fair value of minority financial liability 
Dividends paid by the Company 
New shares issued 
Remeasurement of defined benefit pension schemes (see note 23) 
Remeasurement of other post-retirement benefit schemes 
Tax on remeasurement of pension deficit movement 
Tax on remeasurement of other post-retirement benefit schemes 

At 31 December 2013 

Hedging 
reserve 
(11.5) 
– 
– 
– 
(0.5) 
– 
(12.0) 
– 
– 
0.3  

(11.7) 

Translation 
reserve 
38.7 
(4.3)
0.1 
(2.8)
– 
(0.2)
31.5 
(1.6) 
(0.9)
– 

29.0 

Total 
27.2 
(4.3)
0.1 
(2.8)
(0.5) 
(0.2)
19.5 
(1.6) 
(0.9)
0.3 

17.3 

119.3 
22.4 
(1.1)
(7.3)
(0.4)
(4.3)
(0.4)
128.2 
13.0 
(0.1)
(8.0)
(0.2)
12.9 
(0.3)
(3.9)
0.1 

141.7 

119

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

28 Reconciliation of net cash flow to movement in net funds/(debt) 

£million 

At 1 January 2012 
Cash flow 
Non-cash items 
Exchange differences 

At 1 January 2013 
Cash flow 
Non-cash items 
Exchange differences 

At 31 December 2013 

Borrowings 
and finance 
leases 
(43.6)
31.5 
(0.9)
0.6 

(12.4)
(16.5)
(0.1)
1.4 

(27.6)

Net cash 
58.8  
1.0  
– 
(0.7) 

59.1  
(3.8) 
–   
(0.8) 

54.5  

Net (debt)/ 
funds 
15.2 
32.5 
(0.9)
(0.1)

46.7 
(20.3)
(0.1)
0.6 

26.9 

Net cash includes overdraft balances of £nil (2012: £nil). 

29 Contingent liabilities  
The Group has contingent liabilities amounting to £0.3 million (2012: £0.7 million) in respect of performance bonds and guarantees entered into in 
the normal course of business. The Group is subject to claims which arise in the ordinary course of business. Other than those for which provisions have 
been made and included within note 19, the Directors consider the likelihood of any other claims giving rise to a significant liability to be remote.  

30 Capital commitments 
£million 

Contractual commitments for the purchase of property, plant and equipment 

31 Operating leases 
Operating lease payments charged to the income statement are as follows:  

£million 

Fixtures and equipment 
Land and buildings 

The Group has outstanding commitments under non-cancellable operating leases, which fall due as follows:  

£million 

In less than one year 
Between one and five years 
After five years 

2013 

6.7 

2012 

7.5 

2013 

0.5 
3.1 

2013 

3.2 
8.6 
0.9 

2012 

0.5 
3.0 

2012 

3.7 
8.1 
1.4 

Lease terms for land and buildings are predominantly for less than ten years with rents fixed for an average of four years. There are 
no contingent rents. 

32 Related party transactions 
Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries have been eliminated on consolidation and are not disclosed in this note.  

No related party transactions have taken place in 2013 or 2012 that have affected the financial position or performance of the Group. 

Key management personnel and Directors’ emoluments are disclosed in note 12. 

33 Post balance sheet event 
On 10 January 2014 the Group announced that it is planning to relocate manufacturing operations from Werne, Germany to its facilities in better 
cost regions and has commenced consultation with workforce representatives. At the same time the Group is increasing investment in its Centre of 
Excellence for Research and Development and New Products Innovation in Werne.

120

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
 
 
 
Company balance sheet 

£million 

Fixed assets 
Tangible assets 
Intangible assets 
Investments 
Deferred tax asset 

Current assets 
Debtors 
Cash at bank and in hand 

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year 

Net current assets 

Total assets less current liabilities 
Pension liability 

Net assets 

Capital and reserves 
Called up share capital 
Share premium account 
Profit and loss account 

Shareholders’ funds 

Approved by the Board of Directors on 12 March 2014 and signed on their behalf by: 

Geraint Anderson 
Director 

Shatish Dasani 
Director 

Note 

2013 

2012 

2 
2 
3 
11 

4 

5 

10 

6 
8 
8 

1.6 
4.3 
90.0 
4.1 

1.3 
1.3 
91.9 
8.4 

100.0 

102.9 

155.6 
3.9 

159.5 
(31.0)

128.5 

228.5 
(19.8)

208.7 

39.7 
1.4 
167.6 

208.7 

167.0 
2.3 

169.3 
(24.4)

144.9 

247.8 
(33.7)

214.1 

39.2 
0.7 
174.2 

214.1 

121

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
Notes to the Company financial statements  

1 Significant accounting policies 

Basis of preparation 
The financial statements of TT Electronics plc (the Company) are presented as required by the Companies Act 2006 and have been prepared under 
the historical cost convention as modified by the revaluation of financial assets and derivatives held at fair value and the revaluation of investment 
properties and in accordance with applicable United Kingdom accounting standards and law. 

There were no new standards or amendments to existing standards that became effective in the year. Further, there are no new standards or 
amendments to standards which are issued but not yet effective.  

The principal accounting policies are summarised below and have been applied consistently throughout the current and prior year:  

Tangible fixed assets and depreciation  
Tangible fixed assets are stated at cost less a provision for depreciation. Depreciation is calculated so as to write-off the cost less estimated residual 
value of tangible fixed assets, in equal instalments over their expected useful lives. No depreciation is provided on freehold land. The depreciation rates 
for the major categories of asset are given in note 2 to the consolidated financial statements. The carrying values of fixed assets are reviewed 
for impairment when there is an indication that the assets may be impaired.  

Intangible fixed assets and amortisation 
Acquired computer software licences are capitalised as an intangible asset on the basis of the costs incurred to acquire and bring to use the specific 
software. Costs that are directly associated with the implementation of identifiable and unique software products controlled by the Company, and 
that will probably generate economic benefits exceeding costs beyond one year, are recognised as intangible assets and amortised over a 3 to 5 year 
period. Capitalised software development expenditure is stated at cost less accumulated amortisation. 

Investment properties 
Investment property is recorded at open market value as determined by independent valuers. In accordance with the Statement of Standard 
Accounting Practice (SSAP) 19, depreciation is not provided on investment property on the basis that such property is not held for consumption but for 
investment. The Directors believe, therefore, that this accounting policy is necessary for the accounts to give a true and fair view. 

Changes in the market value of investment properties are not taken to the profit and loss account and are recognised within the revaluation reserve, 
unless a deficit (or its reversal) on an individual investment property is expected to be permanent, in which case it is charged (or credited) in the profit 
and loss account of the period. 

Investments  
Fixed asset investments in subsidiaries are carried at cost less provision for impairment. 

Deferred taxation  
Deferred taxation is the taxation attributable to timing differences between the results computed for taxation purposes and results as stated in the 
financial statements. It is recognised on all timing differences where the transaction or event which gives the Company an obligation to pay more tax, 
or the right to pay less tax in the future, has occurred by the balance sheet date. Deferred tax assets are recognised when it is more likely than not that 
they will be recovered. Deferred tax is measured using the rates of tax enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.  

Pension costs  
The Company operates a pension scheme providing benefits based on final pensionable pay. The assets of the scheme are held separately from 
those of the Company. 

Pension scheme assets are measured using market values. For quoted securities the current bid price is taken as market value. Pension scheme 
liabilities are measured using a projected unit method and discounted at the current rate of return on a high quality corporate bond of equivalent 
term and currency to the liability. 

The pension scheme deficit is recognised in full with the movement in the scheme deficit being split between operating charges, finance items and, 
in the statement of total recognised gains and losses, actuarial gains and losses. 

Foreign currencies  
Assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into sterling at the rates of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date. 

Share-based payments  
Certain employees of the Company receive part of their remuneration in the form of share-based payment transactions, whereby employees render 
services in exchange for shares or rights over shares (equity-settled transactions). The cost of equity-settled transactions with employees is measured 
at fair value at the date at which they are granted. The fair value of share awards with market-related vesting conditions is determined by an external 
consultant and the fair value at the grant date is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period based on the Company’s estimate of shares 
that will eventually vest. The estimate of the number of awards likely to vest is reviewed at each balance sheet date up to the vesting date at which 
point the estimate is adjusted to reflect the actual outcome of awards which have vested. No adjustment is made to the fair value after the vesting 
date even if the awards are forfeited or not exercised. 

122

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc1 Significant accounting policies (continued) 

Leases 
Payments under operating leases are charged to the profit and loss account on a straight-line basis over the lease term.  

Own shares held by Employee Benefit Trust 
Transactions of the Company-sponsored Employee Benefit Trust are treated as being those of the Company and are therefore reflected in the 
Company’s financial statements. In particular, the Trust’s purchases of shares in the Company are debited directly to equity. 

2 Tangible and intangible fixed assets 

£million 

Cost 
At 1 January 2013 
Additions 

At 31 December 2013 

Depreciation 
At 1 January 2013 
Charge for the year 

At 31 December 2013 

Net book value 

At 31 December 2013 
At 31 December 2012 

Intangible 
assets 

Freehold 
land and 
buildings 

Plant, 
equipment 
and vehicles 

Total 
tangible 
fixed assets 

1.6 
3.4 

5.0 

0.3 
0.4 

0.7 

4.3 
1.3 

2.9  
–   

2.9  

2.2  
–   

2.2  

0.7  
0.7  

1.0 
0.5 

1.5 

0.4 
0.2 

0.6 

0.9 
0.6 

3.9 
0.5 

4.4 

2.6 
0.2 

2.8 

1.6 
1.3 

Included within intangible fixed assets are assets under construction with a carrying value of £2.2 million (2012: £nil). 

3 Fixed asset investments  

£million 

Cost 

At 1 January and 31 December 2013 

Provisions 
At 1 January 2013 
Charge for the year 

At 31 December 2013 

Net book value 

At 31 December 2013 
At 31 December 2012 

Subsidiary 
undertakings 

129.4 

37.5 
1.9 

39.4 

90.0 
91.9 

The Company’s principal operating subsidiary undertakings and their locations are shown in note 14.  

The Company owns 100% of the ordinary share capital or equivalent and 100% of voting rights of all subsidiary undertakings other than Rodco 
Limited, which is non-trading and is 60% owned. Shareholdings are held indirectly for all principal operating subsidiary undertakings.  

123

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
  
  
  
  
 
  
Notes to the Company financial statements 
continued 

4 Debtors 
£million 

Amounts falling due within one year 
Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings 
Prepayments and accrued income 
Taxation and social security 

5 Creditors 
£million 

Amounts falling due within one year 
Trade creditors 
Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings 
Taxation and social security 
Accruals and deferred income 

6 Share capital 
£million 

Issued, called up and fully paid 
158,608,324 (2012: 156,950,664) Ordinary shares of 25p each 

2013 

2012 

154.6 
1.0 
– 

155.6 

163.5 
3.3 
0.2 

167.0 

2013 

2012 

3.9 
22.0 
0.5 
4.6 

31.0 

2.6 
17.0 
0.2 
4.6 

24.4 

2013 

2012 

39.7 

39.2 

During 2013 the Company issued 867,400 Ordinary shares on the vesting of the Long Term Incentive Plan awards issued in 2010. The shares were 
then allocated to award holders via an Employee Benefit Trust for nil consideration. A charge of £0.2 million has been recognised in retained earnings 
accordingly. 

The Company also issued 790,260 Ordinary shares as a result of share options being exercised under the 2004 Approved Plan, 1996 Unapproved 
Plan (grants made in 2003), 2004 Approved Plan and Unapproved Plan and the Sharesave scheme and Share Purchase plans. The aggregate 
consideration received was £0.9 million, which resulted in an increase in share premium of £0.7 million. 

7 Share-based payments  
Details of share-based payments are shown in note 25 of the Consolidated financial statements. 

8 Shareholders’ funds 

£million 

At 1 January 2013 
New shares issued 
Actuarial net gain on defined benefit pension schemes 
Tax on actuarial amounts in pension deficit movement 
Share-based payments 
Deferred tax on share-based payments 
Dividends paid by the Company 
Loss for the year 

At 31 December 2013 

Share capital 
39.2 
0.5 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

Share 
premium 
0.7 
0.7 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

Profit and 
loss account 
174.2 
(0.2)
9.6 
(3.3)
(0.1)
(0.2)
(8.0)
(4.4)

39.7  

1.4 

167.6 

9 Loss for the year  
As permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the Company has elected not to present its profit and loss account for the year. The loss 
after tax of the Company for the year was £4.4 million (2012: profit of £61.2 million). The Auditor’s remuneration for audit services is disclosed in 
note 7 to the Consolidated financial statements. 

124

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
  
 
  
 
 
10 Pension schemes  

Defined benefit scheme 
The triennial valuation of the UK scheme as at April 2013 showed a deficit of £19.1 million compared with £39.4 million at April 2010. It was agreed 
with the Trustee that the existing recovery plan is sufficient to address the deficit; namely contributions of £4.1 million, £4.3 million and £4.5 million to 
be paid over the next three years. In addition, the Company has set aside £3.0 million over the last three years to be utilised in agreement with the 
Trustee for reducing the long-term liabilities of the scheme. Further details of the scheme are provided in note 23 to the Group financial statements. 

Defined contribution scheme 
The Company operates a Group personal pension plan for employees and pays contributions to administered pension insurance plans. The Company 
has no further payment obligation once the contributions have been paid. Payments to the defined contribution scheme are charged as an expense 
as they are incurred. The total contributions charged by the Company including employee salary exchange contributions in respect of the year ended 
31 December 2013 were £0.6 million (2012: £0.6 million).  

11 Deferred tax 
The deferred tax asset of £4.1 million (2012: £8.4 million) is made up of an asset of £4.0 million (2012: £7.7 million) in respect of the pension 
liability, the movement in which has been recognised in profit (£0.4 million charge) and equity (£3.3 million charge), and an asset of £0.1 million 
(2012: £0.7 million) in respect of share-based payments, the movement in which has been recognised in profit (£0.4 million charge) and equity 
(£0.2 million charge).  

At 31 December 2013, the Company had the following items for which no deferred tax assets have been recognised: 

  Tax losses £23.5 million (2012: £21.5 million); and 

  Property, plant and equipment £0.9 million (2012: £0.6 million). 

12 Commitments under operating leases 
Annual commitments under non-cancellable operating leases were as follows:  

£million 

On leases expiring: 
Within one year 
Between two and five years 

Land and 
buildings 

Other 

2013 Total 

Land and 
buildings 

Other 

2012 Total 

– 
–  

–  

– 
0.1 

0.1 

– 
0.1 

0.1 

– 
0.4  

0.4  

– 
0.1 

0.1 

– 
0.5 

0.5 

13 Related party transactions 
During 2013 and 2012, the Company did not have any related party transactions other than with wholly owned subsidiaries. 

125

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic Report 
 
  
 
Notes to the Company financial statements 
continued 

14 Principal operating subsidiaries  
The principal operating subsidiaries are:  

Sensing and Control 

AB Elektronik GmbH, Germany  

AB Elektronik Sachsen GmbH, Germany  

TT Electronics Sensing and Control Private Limited, India  

AB Elektronik Sensors (Suzhou) Co Ltd, China 

AB Electronic Manufacturing, Mexico 

Optek Technology, USA, Mexico 

AB Mikroelektronik GmbH, Austria  

TT Electronics Sensing and Control SRL, Romania 

TT Electronics Technology Ltd 

BI Technologies*, USA, Mexico 

TT Electronics Asia Pte Ltd*, Singapore 

* also conducts Components business  

Components 

International Resistive Company, USA, Barbados 

Semelab Limited 

Welwyn Components Limited  

AB Connectors Limited  

AB Electronics (Suzhou) Co Ltd, China 

BI Technologies, Malaysia  

Integrated Manufacturing Services  

TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services Limited  

TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services (Suzhou) Co Ltd, China  

TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services Inc, USA  

New Chapel Electronics Limited 

TT Electronics Integrated Manufacturing Services SRL, Romania 

Abtest Ltd 

Companies are located and incorporated in the UK except where indicated.  

126

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plc 
 
Additional Information

Five-year record

Five-year record

£million (unless otherwise stated)

Revenue

Operating profit2

Profit before taxation2

Earnings/(loss)2

Earnings/(loss) per share (p)2

Dividends – paid and proposed

Dividend per share – paid and proposed (p)

Average number of shares in issue

Net cash/(debt)

Total equity

2013

532.2

30.2

29.5

22.4

14.2

8.5 

5.4 

157.6 

26.9 

203.3

2012(1)

476.9 

28.7

25.3

18.6 

11.9 

7.8 

5.0 

156.1 

46.7 

191.1 

2011

509.6    

28.7    

24.5    

17.6    

11.4    

6.8    

4.4    

154.9    

15.2    

191.4    

2010

555.5 

24.9 

20.6 

13.9 

9.0 

4.3 

2.8 

154.8 

(9.9)

179.1 

2009

463.5 

6.4 

0.8 

(1.8)

(1.2)

– 

–  

155.0 

(56.9)

155.8 

Notes 
(1) Results for 2012 have been restated for changes arising from the implementation of IAS 19 ‘Employee Benefits’.
(2) Operating profit, profit before taxation, earnings and earnings per share are stated before exceptional items.

127

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcFinancial StatementsGovernanceAdditional InformationStrategic ReportAdditional Information

Shareholder information

Annual General Meeting 

The Annual General Meeting will be held on 9 May 2014 at 11.30 am at the offices of Hudson Sandler Financial and Corporate Communications, 2nd Floor, 29 Cloth Fair, 
London EC1A 7NN.

Results

Announcement of 2014 half year results – late August 2014.

Preliminary announcement of 2014 results – mid March 2015.

Annual Report 2014 – to be posted mid April 2015.

Dividends

For the year ending 31 December 2013, the Board has recommended a final dividend of 3.8p per share which will be paid on 5 June 2014 to shareholders on the register on 
23 May 2014 (2012: 3.5p). An interim dividend of 1.6p per share was paid on 31 October 2013 (2012: 1.5p).

Multiple accounts on the shareholder register

If you have received two or more copies of this document, this means that there is more than one account in your name on the shareholder register. This may be caused by either 
your name or address appearing on each account in a slightly different way. For security reasons, the Registrars will not amalgamate the accounts without your written consent. 
If you would like any multiple accounts combined into one account, please write to Equiniti Limited at the address given below.

Share dealing services

Shareview Dealing is a telephone and internet service provided by Equiniti. It offers a simple and convenient way of buying and selling TT Electronics plc shares.

Log on to www.shareview.co.uk/dealing or call 0845 603 7037 between 8.00 am and 4.30 pm, Monday to Friday (except bank holidays), for more information about this service 
and for details of the rates and charges. Please note that telephone lines remain open until 6.00 pm for enquiries.

A weekly postal dealing service is also available and a form together with terms and conditions can be obtained by calling 0871 384 2248*. Commission is 1.75 per cent with a 
minimum charge of £50.

ShareGift

ShareGift is a charity share donation scheme for shareholders, administered by The Orr Mackintosh Foundation. lt is especially for those who may wish to dispose of a small parcel 
of shares whose value makes it uneconomical to sell on a commission basis. Further information can be obtained at www.sharegift.org or from Equiniti.

Shareholder enquiries

Equiniti maintain the register of members of the Company. If you have any queries concerning your shareholding, or if any of your details change, please contact the Registrars:

Equiniti Limited 
Aspect House 
Spencer Road 
Lancing 
West Sussex 
BN99 6DA

Telephone 0871 384 2396* (or +44 121 415 7047 if calling from outside the United Kingdom)

Fax 0871 384 2100*

Textphone for shareholders with hearing difficulties 0871 384 2255*

Equiniti also offer a range of shareholder information on-line at www.shareview.co.uk

* UK calls to 0871 numbers cost 8p per minute plus network extras. Lines are open from 8.30 am to 5.30 pm, Monday to Friday (except bank holidays).

Website

Information on the Group’s financial performance, activities and share price is available at www.ttelectronics.com

128

Annual Report 2013TT Electronics plcDesigned and produced by Radley Yeldar (www.ry.com) using the paperless proofing system Wizardry. 

TT Electronics plc are committed to caring for the environment and looking for sustainable ways to minimise our impact on it.

This report has been printed on Symbol Freelife, a paper which is certified by the Forest Stewardship Council®. 

The paper is made in a mill registered to EMAS, the Eco Management Audit Scheme,  
and with ISO14001 environmental management system accreditation. 

This report was printed by Pureprint Group, using pureprint environmental  
print technology, a CarbonNeutral company certified to FSC and IS0 14001.

FSC – Forest Stewardship Council. This ensures there is an audited chain of custody from the  
tree in the well-managed forest through to the finished document in the printing factory.

 ISO 14001 – A pattern of control for an environmental management system against which  
an organisation can be credited by a third party.

Make Possible

TT Electronics plc

Clive House
12 – 18 Queens Road
Weybridge
Surrey KT13 9XB

Reg No 87249

Tel   +44(0) 1932 825300
Fax  +44(0) 1932 836450

For more information on our business please visit

www.ttelectronics.com

T

T

E

l

e

c

t

r

o

n

i

c

s

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

3